Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

●

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

●

Dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped)

●

Cruise control system (if equipped)

●

Anti-lock brake system

●

SRS airbag system

● Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed

• Accelerator status

• Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Shift position

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

●

Data Transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.

●

Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Toyota in a law suit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

●

Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S. mainland only)

If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service

Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

●

To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●

Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

WARNING

■

General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

WARNING:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.

1 2 3

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

How to search

■ Searching by name

• Alphabetical index .......P. 478

■ Searching by installation position

• Pictorial index................P. 14

■ Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) ........P. 474

■ Searching by title

• Table of contents .............P. 2

Pictorial index

■

Exterior

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 97

Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 97

Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 135

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . P. 411

Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 390, 396

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103

Opening from inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103

Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 92, 103

Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 390, 396

Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132

Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132

Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 121

Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264

Pictorial index

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 180

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 255

Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 186

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 186

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 426

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 342

Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431

Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 255

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . P. 342

Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 426

Coping with overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 418

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 365, Wattages: P. 432)

8 Headlights/daytime running lights *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

Parking lights * /daytime running lights *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

Front turn signal/parking lights *

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171

Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

Rear turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171

Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

: If equipped

Pictorial index

■

Instrument panel

Engine switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160

Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160

Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 381

When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 409

Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 169

Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 79

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . P. 79

Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 74

When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 388

Pictorial index

Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 82

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 82

When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 396

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171

Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 173

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . P. 173

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 180

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 180

Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 341

Hood lock release lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . P. 128

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260

Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 264

Audio/Navigation system

* 10

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 286

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

■

Switches

Driving position memory switches

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 121

Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 380

Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344

Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 104

Rear sunshade switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 291

Trunk opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 103

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239

VSC OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 251

PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198

Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 132

Window lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 135

Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 99

Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 135

Pictorial index

Audio remote control switches * 2

Paddle shift switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 166

Telephone switches * 2

Talk switch * 2

“DISP” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 83

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 228

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) switch * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211

Cruise control switch

Cruise control * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235

Dynamic radar cruise control

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 222

Back switch * 2

* 1

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

■

Interior

SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 34

Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 99

Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 126

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28

Assist grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 293

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 290

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 277

Power outlet

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 288

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 119

Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 24

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 172

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 172

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 256

Warning light/buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 388

Pictorial index

Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 288

Power outlet * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 288

Wireless charger switch * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 280

Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 277

Air conditioning controls * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260

Rear seat heater switches * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269

Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 276

Driving mode select switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 248

Seat heater/ventilator switches * 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269

AUX/USB port * 2

* 1

: If equipped

: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 278

Moon roof switches

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 138

“SOS” button

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 301

Interior lights/personal lights

* 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 273

Interior light/ambient lights

* 1

switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 273

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 285

Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 285

Compass display

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307

Compass switch

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307

Garage door opener switches

* 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 294

Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130

* 1

: If equipped

: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving...................... 24

For safe driving ................... 26

Seat belts ............................ 28

SRS airbags........................ 34

Front passenger occupant classification system .............................. 46

Safety information for children ............................. 52

Child restraint systems........ 53

Installing child restraints...... 57

Exhaust gas precautions ....................... 67

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system .............................. 68

Alarm................................... 70

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.) ............................. 72

1-1. For safe use

Before driving

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

* : Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■

When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

●

Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

●

Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

CTY11AX052

1-1. For safe use

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (

→ P. 119)

Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. ( →

P. 119)

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. ( →

P. 128)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. ( →

P. 126)

Wear the seat belt correctly. (

→

P. 28)

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (

→

P. 28)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

(

→ P. 53)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (

→

P. 130, 132)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

●

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

●

Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

●

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

●

Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

2 To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.

2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

1-1. For safe use

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■

Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (

→

P. 57)

■

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

●

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ( →

P. 53)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (

→

P. 28)

■

Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■

Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■

Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

●

Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( →

P. 28)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( →

P. 28)

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor (front seats)

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (

→

P. 29)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

●

Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

●

Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

●

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

◆

SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

1-1. For safe use

◆

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS curtain shield airbags

●

Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

●

Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

Front impact sensors

Knee airbags

Side impact sensors (front doors)

4 Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters

Front passenger airbag

Front side airbags

Curtain shield airbags

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

Side impact sensors (front)

Rear side airbags

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

16 Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

17 Airbag sensor assembly

1-1. For safe use

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

WARNING

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, nonslippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

SRS airbag precautions

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

●

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

●

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. ( →

P. 53)

●

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

WARNING

■

SRS airbag precautions

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

1-1. For safe use

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

●

Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

SRS airbag precautions

● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

●

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

●

Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

●

Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

●

Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches, or roof luggage carrier

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

●

Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●

Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.

● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required.

If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (

→

P. 301)

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 -

18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

●

The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. ( →

P. 46)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

●

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

●

The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

●

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

1-1. For safe use

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

●

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

●

Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

●

The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

●

The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or lowspeed frontal collision.

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

● Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

1-1. For safe use

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

●

Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult * 1

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG ON”

Off

* 2

or flashing

* 3

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Activated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

■ Child * 4

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG

ON” * 4

Off

* 2

or flashing

* 3

Deactivated or activated

* 4

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Deactivated or activated

* 4

Activated

1-1. For safe use

■ Child restraint system with infant * 5

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

“AIR BAG

OFF” * 6

Off

* 2

or flashing * 3

Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Activated

Deactivated

■ Unoccupied

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

Activated

“AIR BAG OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

■ There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

SRS warning light

Seat belt reminder light

1-1. For safe use

“AIR BAG OFF”

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated

* 1

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/ her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2

: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

* 3

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt

* 4

: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

* 5

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (

→ P. 53)

* 6

: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (

→ P. 57)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

●

Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pockets).

●

Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

●

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

●

If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. ( →

P. 57)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

●

Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.

●

Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.

● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

●

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(

→

P. 57)

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

 Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

 Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat

 Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (

→ P. 28)

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

●

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

●

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.

Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

●

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

●

Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

●

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.

Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

CTY11AX014

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism

(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (

→

P. 30)

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system

Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position. (

→

P. 126)

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Rear left seat only: Slide the rear center seat belt to the side to prevent it from getting pinched in the lower anchorage.

 Type A

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

 Type B

Latch the buckles onto the

LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

1-1. For safe use

Canada only

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

2 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

3 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use

4 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

■

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat

Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position. (

→

P. 126)

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

1-1. For safe use

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (

→

P. 64)

■ Booster seat

1 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

1-1. For safe use

2 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(

→ P. 28)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Adjust the head restraint to the downmost position. (

→

P. 126)

Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt or

LATCH anchors.

3 Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

■

Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. ( →

P. 30)

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

1-1. For safe use

WARNING

■

When installing a child restraint system

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

●

Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases to enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■

Important points while driving

● Keep the trunk lid closed.

● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking

●

If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING

■

Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■

To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Alarm

The alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.

●

The hood is opened.

● Some models: The window is tapped or broken.

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:

●

Unlock the doors or open the trunk.

● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

1-2. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■

Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:

●

Nobody is in the vehicle.

●

The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

●

No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.

● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.

■ Alarm-operated door lock

● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders.

● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles.

Do not remove under penalty of law.

Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators .......................... 74

Gauges and meters ............ 79

Multi-information display............................... 82

Fuel consumption information ........................ 89

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on where the vehicle is sold.

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.

* 1 * 1

Brake system warning light (

→ P. 388)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

Brake system warning light (

→

P. 388)

(Canada)

* 1

Charging system warning light (

→

P. 388)

Slip indicator ( →

P. 390)

Open door warning light

(

→

P. 390)

Low fuel level warning light (

→

P. 390)

* 1

Malfunction indicator lamp ( →

P. 388)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

Malfunction indicator lamp (

→

P. 388)

(Canada)

* 1

SRS warning light

(

→

P. 389)

* 1

ABS warning light

(

→

P. 389)

(U.S.A.)

* 1

ABS warning light

(

→ P. 389)

(Canada)

* 1

* 1, 2, 3

Low engine oil pressure warning light (

→

P. 388)

* 1

Electric power steering system warning light

( →

P. 389)

2, 4

Seat belt reminder light

( →

P. 390)

PCS warning light

(

→

P. 389)

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert with steering control) indicator (

→

P. 390)

2. Instrument cluster

* 1

Tire pressure warning light (

→ P. 391)

* 1

Master warning light

( →

P. 391)

* 1

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2

: If equipped

* 3

: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

* 4

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

2. Instrument cluster

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

→ P. 171)

* 1, 2

Slip indicator (

→

P. 251)

Headlight indicator

(

→

P. 173)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(

→

P. 173)

Headlight high beam indicator ( →

P. 173)

* 3

Security indicator

(

→ P. 68, 70)

* 1

* 4

Eco Driving Indicator

Light ( →

P. 81)

Automatic high beam indicator ( →

P. 176)

Eco drive mode indicator

(

→

P. 248)

* 1

VSC OFF indicator

(

→

P. 252)

* 1, 3

AIR BAG

“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator (

→

P. 46)

* 5

Cruise control “SET” indicator (

→ P. 222, 235)

* 4, 5 Dynamic radar cruise control indicator

( →

P. 222)

* 4, 5

Cruise control indicator

( →

P. 235)

* 1, 4, 6

PCS warning light

( →

P. 202)

* 4, 5

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert with steering control) indicator ( →

P. 211)

Sport mode indicator

(

→ P. 248)

2. Instrument cluster

* 1

* 2

: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

* 3

: This light illuminates on the center panel.

* 4

: If equipped

* 5

: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

* 6

: The light turns on when the system is off.

WARNING

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

Gauges and meters

2. Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on where the vehicle is sold.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (

→ P. 82)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Trip meter reset knob/instrument panel light control knob

→

P. 80

Odometer and trip meter display

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( →

P. 165)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

2. Instrument cluster

Changing the trip meter display

Switches between trip meter “A” and “B” displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the knob will reset the trip meter.

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Darker

Brighter

2. Instrument cluster

■ Eco-friendly driving

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on. If the acceleration exceeds the

Eco driving accelerator upper limit, or the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in the following conditions:

● The shift lever is in anything other than

●

The paddle shift switch is used.

●

The vehicle is in sport mode.

● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

■

The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights

●

When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the control knob is turned fully clockwise.

● When the knob is turned fully clockwise, the display audio/navigation system screen will always be in day mode regardless of the headlight switch position.

■ Customization

The instrument panel light auto dimmer control can be changed.

(Customizable feature: →

P. 449)

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

●

The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. ( →

P. 418)

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

Display contents

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data.

●

Trip information (

→

P. 83)

Displays the following items:

• Distance to empty

• Average fuel economy

• Current fuel economy

• ECO Drive Level

• Turn-by-turn navigation

(vehicles with a navigation system)

● Settings ( →

P. 85)

●

Warning messages and reminder messages (

→

P. 396)

● Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems or when a reminder message is required. The display returns to the previous screen by pressing the “DISP” button. ( →

P. 83)

●

Cruise control display (if equipped) (

→

P. 235)

● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (

→ P. 222)

●

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) display (if equipped) (

→

P. 211)

● PCS (Pre-Collision System) display (if equipped) (

→ P. 198)

●

Tire pressure warning system display (

→

P. 343)

2. Instrument cluster

Trip information

■ Switching the display

Items displayed can be switched by pressing the

“DISP” button.

■ Distance to empty

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

■ Digital speedometer

Displays the current vehicle speed.

■ Average fuel economy

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

• The function can be reset by pressing and holding the “DISP” button when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

■ Current fuel economy

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

2. Instrument cluster

■ ECO Drive Level

Suggests Eco driving level based on acceleration.

All green suggests the status of the most Eco-friendly driving.

2 All blue suggests the status of the least Eco-friendly driving.

■ Sway warning (if equipped)

Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention using a segment display.

The fewer segments lit, the more the driver may need to rest.

This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system. The display is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warning are met. (

→

P. 211)

■ Turn-by-turn navigation (vehicles with a navigation system)

Displays information from the navigation system about the next turn on the guidance route.

2. Instrument cluster

Setting up the displays

◆

Customizable items

■ Meter settings

Item Settings Details

Digital Speed

OFF

English

Select to enable/disable the digital speedometer.

Units (vehicles without a navigation system)

Select to change the units of measure displayed.

Turn-by-Turn (vehicles with a navigation system)

Metric

OFF

Select to enable/disable the Turnby-turn navigation.

ECO Indicator

Select to enable/disable the Eco

Driving Indicator Light.

■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped) (

→

P. 211)

The following LDA system settings can be changed:

Steering Assist

Sensitivity

Alert

Item

Sensitivity

Settings Details

OFF

Standard

High

Select to enable/disable steering wheel assistance.

Select to set the warning sensitivity.

Select to enable/disable the vehicle sway warning.

OFF

Standard

Low

Select to set the vehicle sway warning sensitivity.

High

2. Instrument cluster

◆

Changing the settings

1 While the vehicle is stopped, press the “DISP” button until the “Settings” screen appears.

2 Press and hold the “DISP” button while the “Settings” screen is displayed.

3 Press the “DISP” button to highlight the desired item.

4 Press and hold the “DISP” button to change the setting.

2. Instrument cluster

5 To exit the “Settings” screen, press the “DISP” button repeatedly until “EXIT” is highlighted and then press and hold the “DISP” button.

If the Lane Departure settings screen is displayed, press the

“DISP” button repeatedly until

“RETURN” is highlighted, then press and hold the “DISP” switch to return to the “Settings” screen.

The display goes back to step 1 .

■ System check display

After turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked.

■ Trip summary display

When the engine is turned off, drive information data since the engine was started is displayed for 3 seconds.

■ Setting display automatic cancelation

In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.

● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed

● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed

■ Tire inflation pressure

● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted

● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable radio wave conditions.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

2. Instrument cluster

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

WARNING

■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

■

Cautions during setting up the display

As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■ During setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.

2. Instrument cluster

Fuel consumption information

Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the audio system screen.

Audio system

Trip information

Press “APPS” button and select

“Eco” to display the “Trip Information” screen.

If the “Trip Information” screen does not appear, select “Trip

Information”.

Average vehicle speed

Elapsed time

Range

Previous fuel consumption per minute

Current fuel consumption

Reset the trip information data

7 “Past Record” screen appears

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

2. Instrument cluster

Past record

Press “APPS” button and select “Eco” to display the “Past Record” screen.

If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, select “Past Record”.

Previous fuel economy record

Current fuel economy

Best recorded fuel economy

Update the past record data

Reset the past record data

“Trip Information” screen appears

7 Average recorded fuel economy

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Updating the past record data

Selecting “Update” on the “Past Record” screen will update the past record data.

■ Resetting the data

Selecting “Clear” on the consumption screen will reset the consumption data.

Selecting “Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past record data.

■ Customization

The touch button sensitivity can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 449)

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

Keys .................................... 92

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Doors .................................. 97

Trunk ................................. 103

Smart key system ............. 108

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ........................ 119

Driving position memory ........................... 121

Head restraints.................. 126

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel .................. 128

Inside rear view mirror ...... 130

Outside rear view mirrors............................. 132

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows ................. 135

Moon roof.......................... 138

Keys

3-1. Key information

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system

(

→

P. 108)

• Operating the wireless remote control function

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors (

→

P. 97)

Unlocks all the doors (

→

P. 97)

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

3 Unlocks the trunk

(press and hold) (

→

P. 103)

4 Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (

→

P. 93)

3-1. Key information

Using the mechanical key

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side.

If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and reattempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. ( →

P. 411)

■

Panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off, lock the glove box and armrest door as circumstances demand. ( →

P. 104, 276, 292)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

■ If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

3-1. Key information

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Conditions affecting operation

→

P. 114

■

Electronic key battery depletion

● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops.

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( →

P. 360)

• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers

■

Replacing the battery

→

P. 360

■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

■

Customization

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

→

P. 449)

3-1. Key information

■ Certification for wireless remote control

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAP

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

NOTE:

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3-1. Key information

NOTICE

■

To prevent key damage

● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.

●

Do not disassemble the keys.

● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

●

Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as

TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■

Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside

◆

Smart key system

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Some models, grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

* : The door unlock settings can be changed. ( →

P. 101)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆

Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle

If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time.

■ Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■ Alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. ( →

P. 70)

■ If the smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. ( →

P. 411)

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( →

P. 360)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside

◆

Door lock switches

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

◆

Inside lock buttons

Unlocks the door

Locks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

100

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 449.

Function Operation

Speed linked door locking function

All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Shift position linked door locking function

All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P.

Shift position linked door unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

101

■ Switching the door unlock function (some models)

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

Turn the engine switch off.

2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold

or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least

5 seconds, and repeat step

Multi-information display

Unlocking function Beep

Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.

Holding a passenger’s door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Pings once

Holding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.

Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( →

P. 70)

■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.

(

→ P. 411)

■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart key system or wireless remote control

→

P. 114

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 449)

102

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING

■

To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

103

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle

Press the opener switch.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

◆

Smart key system

While carrying the electronic key, press the button on the trunk lid.

When all the doors are unlocked with the power door lock system, the trunk can be opened without carrying the electronic key.

◆

Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

104

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

When closing the trunk

Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk without applying force to the side and push the trunk down from the outside to close it.

Luggage security system

The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft.

Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener.

Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

105

■ Operation signal

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.

■

Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside

●

When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.

● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

●

Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed.

Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

●

The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

106

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ In case the trunk opener is not actuated

1 Pull down the rear armrest and open the door behind it.

2 Pull the loop of wire to unlock the trunk lid.

This is used in case the trunk lid cannot be unlocked due to a discharged battery or other trouble.

■

When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

→

P. 93

■ Customization

The trunk opener main switch can be deactivated.

(Customizable feature: →

P. 449)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Before driving

● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to play in the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

107

WARNING

■

Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

●

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

108

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart key system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

●

Locks and unlocks the doors (

→

P. 97)

●

Opens the trunk (

→

P. 103)

●

Starts the engine (

→

P. 160)

■ Antenna location

1 Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna inside the trunk

Antenna outside the trunk

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

 Type A

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3

ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle.

(Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk

 Type B

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3

ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

109

110

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Alarms and warning indicators

An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message.

(

→ P. 396)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart key system while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Interior alarm pings once and exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

111

Alarm

Interior alarm sounds continuously

Situation Correction procedure

The engine switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (The driver's door was opened when the engine switch was in

ACCESSORY mode.)

Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.

The driver’s door was opened while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the engine switch.

Shift the shift lever to P.

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when alarms are sounded and a message or key icon is displayed.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Continuous Continuous

Once

3 times

Situation

Correction procedure

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver’s door was opened and closed while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the engine switch.

• Change the shift position to P.

• Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver’s door was opened and closed while the shift position P was selected without turning off the engine switch.

Turn the engine switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

Indicates that a door other than the driver’s door has been opened and closed with the engine switch in any mode other than off and the electronic key outside of the detection area.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

112

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Interior buzzer

Once

9 times

Once

Exterior buzzer

Continuous

(5 seconds)

⎯

Situation

Correction procedure

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the engine switch off.

Turn the engine switch off and lock the doors again.

Indicates that the electronic key is not present when attempting to start the engine.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle.

Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

Indicates that the electronic key battery is low.

Replace the battery.

(

→

P. 360)

Indicates that the steering lock has not been released.

Release the steering lock.

(

→ P. 163)

• When the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the engine switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

• The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the engine switch was pressed two consecutive times.

Touch the electronic key to the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

113

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

● In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

● If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding . Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

114

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping:

→ P. 411)

● When the electronic key battery is depleted

●

Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

●

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

115

■ Note for the entry function

● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.

●

Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

116

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Note for locking the doors

● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

●

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. ( →

P. 113)

● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

■ Note for the unlocking function

● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (

→

P. 113)

●

If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

117

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

●

The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (

→

P. 449)

■ To operate the system properly

● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.

The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (

→ P. 105)

■

If the smart key system does not operate properly

● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (

→ P. 411)

● Unlocking the trunk:

→ P. 106

● Starting the engine: →

P. 412

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→

P. 360

■

Customization

Settings (e. g. operation signal) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

→

P. 449)

■

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

● Locking and unlocking the doors:

→

P. 97, 411

● Unlocking the trunk:

→ P. 103, 106

● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes:

→ P. 412

● Stopping the engine: →

P. 160

118

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Certification for the smart key system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-51

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-54

NOTE:

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

WARNING

■

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas.

(

→

P. 108)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves.

Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

●

Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

 Driver’s seat

3-3. Adjusting the seats

119

 Passenger’s seat

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch (if equipped for passenger’s seat)

Vertical height adjustment switch (if equipped for passenger’s seat)

Lumbar support adjustment switch (if equipped for passenger’s seat)

Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)

120

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Power easy access system (vehicles with driving position memory)

The auto away/return function enables easy access by activating when the driver attempts to enter or exit the vehicle.

● When the engine switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode or the driver’s seat belt has been fastened, the driver’s seat will move forward.

●

When the engine switch has been turned off and the driver’s seat belt has been unfastened, the driver’s seat will move backward.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle) can be changed. (Customizable features:

→ P. 449)

WARNING

■

When adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■ Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

■

When adjusting the seat positions

Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

Driving position memory

∗

3-3. Adjusting the seats

121

This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.

Power easy access system

The seat is automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

When all of the following have been performed, the driver’s seat is automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.

• The shift lever has been shifted to P.

• The engine switch has been turned off.

• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.

When any of the following is performed, the driver’s seat automatically returns to its original position.

• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.

■ Operation of the power easy access system

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already close to the rearmost position, etc.

■ Customization

The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be customized. (Customizable features: →

P. 449)

∗

: If equipped

122

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors) can be recorded and recalled by pressing a button.

Two different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

■ Recording procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.

4 While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the “SET” button is pressed, press button “1” or

“2” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■ Recall procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

3 Press button “1” or “2” to recall the desired position.

123

■

To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

● Press the “SET” button.

● Press button “1” or “2”.

● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).

■ Seat positions that can be memorized ( →

P. 119)

The seat position, with the exception of the portions adjusted by the seat cushion length switch and lumbar support switch, can be recorded.

■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

■

In order to correctly use the driving position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.

124

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Memory recall function

Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.

■ Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the following:

Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode and recall the position which you want to link.

2 While pressing the button to recall the position, press the driver’s door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

The driving position is recalled when the driver’s door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver’s door is opened.

■ Recall procedure

1 Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart key system or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position. However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle easier.

If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or fasten a seat belt.

The seat will move to the recorded position.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

125

■ Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key to which you want to cancel the linked door unlock operation.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function

●

Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.

●

If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart key system, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.

■

Customization

The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.

(Customizable features:

→

P. 449)

WARNING

■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

126

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Rear seats (except center seat)

1 Up

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints (except rear center seat)

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■ Installing the head restraints

 Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Lock release button

 Rear seats (except center seat)

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

■

Adjusting the height of the head restraints (except rear center seat)

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

127

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint (except center seat)

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

WARNING

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

●

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

128

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Adjustment procedure

1 Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

129

WARNING

■

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury. Also, the horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

130

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Anti-glare function

 Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position

Anti-glare position

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

131

 Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

ON/OFF

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with an auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

132

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

Left

Right

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Right

Down

Left

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

133

Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)

When the mirror select switch is in the L or R position, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.

To disable this function, move the mirror select switch to the neutral position (between L and R).

■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing

With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position (angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.

If the normal position is changed, readjust the tilt down angle.

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. ( →

P. 264)

■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (vehicles with driving position memory)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. ( →

P. 121)

■

Auto anti-glare function (vehicles with outer foot lights)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (

→ P. 130)

134

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

WARNING

■

Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■

When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■

When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing

One-touch closing *

Opening

One-touch opening *

: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

135

136

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■

Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■ When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.

●

After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

●

If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.

3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ When the battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the battery.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

137

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

●

The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (

→ P. 135)

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

●

When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.

■

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

●

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

138

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

∗

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Opening and closing

Opens the moon roof *

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

Closes the moon roof *

* : Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

Tilting up and down

Tilts the moon roof up *

Tilts the moon roof down *

: Lightly press either way of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

∗

: If equipped

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

139

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■

Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

140

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.

* 1

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.

* 2

Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the “UP” switch

* 1

until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.

3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.

* 1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.

* 2

Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.

Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

* 1

: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

* 2

: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the

“CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

141

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■

Opening the moon roof

● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

●

Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■

Closing the moon roof

● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.

●

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

●

■

Jam protection function

● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

142

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle............. 144

Cargo and luggage ........... 154

Vehicle load limits ............. 157

Trailer towing..................... 158

Dinghy towing ................... 159

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch .............................. 160

Automatic transmission.................... 165

Turn signal lever................ 171

Parking brake .................... 172

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch ................ 173

Automatic High Beam ....... 176

Windshield wipers and washer ............................ 180

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap .......................... 186

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P ..... 190

PCS

(Pre-Collision

System)........................... 198

LDA

(Lane Departure Alert with steering control)....... 211

Dynamic radar cruise control ............................. 222

Cruise control.................... 235

BSM

(Blind Spot Monitor) ........ 239

• The Blind Spot

Monitor function ............ 241

• The Rear Cross

Traffic Alert function ......................... 245

Driving mode select switches .......................... 248

Driving assist systems ...... 250

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ............. 255

143

144

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine

→

P. 160

Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. ( →

P. 165)

Release the parking brake. (

→

P. 172)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a stop.

2 If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. ( →

P. 165)

Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake ( →

P. 172), and shift the shift lever to P (

→ P.

165).

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Press the engine switch to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

4-1. Before driving

145

Starting off on a steep uphill

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

■ Driving in the rain

●

Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

●

Refrain from driving at high speeds in the rain, as there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■

Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

● When the accelerator pedal is released

146

4-1. Before driving

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●

For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down operation.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

→ P. 433)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■

When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■

When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

4-1. Before driving

147

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving the vehicle

●

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:

→

P. 381

●

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

→ P. 165)

● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

148

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

●

Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever

●

Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●

Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

●

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

4-1. Before driving

149

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■

When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

150

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is parked

●

Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

●

Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

●

Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

4-1. Before driving

151

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■

When braking

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

●

If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

●

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

●

The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

152

4-1. Before driving

NOTICE

■

When driving the vehicle

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

●

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( →

P. 397)

4-1. Before driving

153

NOTICE

■

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

●

Engine stalling

●

Short in electrical components

●

Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, etc.

●

Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

154

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400

−

750 (5

150) =

650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

(

→

P. 157)

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

(vehicle capacity weight)

(

→

P. 424)

4-1. Before driving

155

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B * 2

lb. (kg) - A * 1

lb. (kg) = C * 3

lb. (kg)

* 1

: A = Weight of people

* 2

: B = Total load capacity

* 3

: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D * 4

lb. (kg) = E * 5

lb. (kg)

* 4

: D = Additional weight of people

* 5

: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

156

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

4-1. Before driving

157

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

◆

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): ( →

P. 424)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆

Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆

Towing capacity

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

◆

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.

(

→ P. 352)

WARNING

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

158

4-1. Before driving

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

4-1. Before driving

159

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

160

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Messages indicating how to start the engine and how to turn to ACCES-

SORY mode will be displayed alternately on the multi-information display.

Press the engine switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.

Stopping the engine

Stop the vehicle.

Set the parking brake (

→

Press the engine switch.

P. 172), and shift the shift lever to P.

Driving-related data will be displayed on the multi-information display.

(

→

P. 87)

4-2. Driving procedures

161

Changing engine switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off *

The emergency flashers can be used.

The multi-information display will not be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

A message indicating how to start the engine will be displayed on the multi-information display.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

* : If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, a message indicating to shift the shift lever to P will be displayed on the multi-information display. At this time, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “Turn Power OFF” is displayed on the multi-information display and then press the engine switch once.

4 Check that “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display is turned off.

162

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI-

TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

■ Electronic key battery depletion

→

P. 94

■

Conditions affecting operation

→

P. 114

■ Notes for the entry function

→

P. 115

■

If the engine does not start

● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. ( →

P. 68)

Contact your Toyota dealer.

●

Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P.

■ Steering lock

After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

4-2. Driving procedures

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

A message informing the driver that the steering wheel is locked will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the engine switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

163

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.

In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When a message requesting the smart key system be inspected is displayed on the multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

■

If the electronic key battery is depleted

→

P. 360

■ Operation of the engine switch

●

If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.

● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.

■ If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

→

P. 411

■

Customization

The time elapsed before the engine switch related messages on the multiinformation display turn off can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 449)

164

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■

When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly

3 times or more in succession. (

→

P. 381)

However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

■

To prevent battery discharge

● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.

●

Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

■ When starting the engine

●

Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission

4-2. Driving procedures

Shifting the shift lever

165

While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose

Shift position

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

* 1

S mode driving

* 2

(

→ P. 166)

* 1

: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D position for normal driving.

* 2

: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents upshifting above the selected range.

166

4-2. Driving procedures

Changing shift ranges in S mode

When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift switches can be operated as follows:

 Shift lever  Paddle shift switches

1 Upshifting 2 Downshifting

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to “4” or “5” according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to “3” if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position. (

→

P. 168)

■ Shift ranges and their functions

● The vehicle is allowed to shift up and down to provide the most suitable gear selection based on your driving situation. (e.g. S4:

1 to 4 or, 4 to 1)

●

You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

●

You can choose the gear range you want for different levels of acceleration. (e.g. uphill, sporty driving, etc.)

4-2. Driving procedures

167

Selecting shift ranges in the D position

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from “1” to “5”, or D will be displayed in the meter.

To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time.

When a shift range higher than “5” is selected, the shift range will return to the normal D position.

When the vehicle comes to a stop, the shift range will return to the normal D position.

168

4-2. Driving procedures

■ S mode

●

When the shift range is “4” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to “6”.

● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.

●

To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot.

■ AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver input and the driving situation.

AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.

(Shifting the shift lever to the S position or paddle shifting cancels the function.)

■

When driving with cruise control or radar cruise control activated

When downshifting to 5 or 4 by shifting the shift lever to the S position or paddle shifting, cruise control or radar cruise control will not be canceled.

(

→ P. 222, 235)

■ Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in ON mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.

4-2. Driving procedures

169

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch is off.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

■ If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.)

■

Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode or paddle shifting)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

170

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■

When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

4-2. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

The lever will return to its original position after operation.

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn

171

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

■ When the lever is pushed and held partway

The turn signals will keep flashing until the lever is released.

■ Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed. (Customizable feature

→ P. 449)

172

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake

To set the parking brake, fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

U.S.A. Canada

■ Parking the vehicle

→

P. 144

■ Usage in winter time

→

P. 256

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

173

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

The headlights, parking lights, daytime running lights (

→

P. 174) and so

on turn on and off automatically (when the engine switch is in IGNI-

TION ON mode).

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights

(

→ P. 174) and instru-

ment panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all the lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.

* 1

The daytime running lights turn off.

* 2

The daytime running lights turn on. ( →

P. 174)

* 1

: For the U.S.A.

* 2

: For Canada

Turning on the high beam headlights

1 With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

174

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system

●

Vehicles with halogen headlights (low beam):

The daytime running lights illuminate the headlight high beams, and they are darker than the headlight high beams.

Vehicles with discharge headlights (low beam) or LED headlights:

The daytime running lights illuminate the parking lights, and they are brighter than parking lights.

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake released

• The headlight switch is in (Canada only), or (when the surroundings are bright) position

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate due to the conditions above, even if the parking brake is set again.

● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

●

Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■

Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

■ Automatic light off system

● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the engine switch is turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)

● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .

If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

175

■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCES-

SORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.

■

Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 449)

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

176

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Automatic High Beam

∗

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically turns the high beam on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.

■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

1 Put the headlight switch in the

“AUTO” position.

2 Push the lever away from you.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

∗

: If equipped

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning the high beam on/off manually

■ Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High

Beam system again.

■ Switching to high beam

Turn the light switch to position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

177

178

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

●

When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):

• Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

●

If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned off:

• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

■ Camera sensor detection information

●

The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road

• When vehicles ahead have no lights

● The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

●

The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.

● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

179

● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.

• The windshield is cracked or damaged.

• The inside rear view mirror or camera sensor is deformed or dirty.

• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.

• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or have are not aimed properly.

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.

• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).

• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.

• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.

• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.

• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.

• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.

• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.

• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

■

If the Automatic High Beam indicator flashes

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Customization

The automatic high beam can be deactivated.

(Customizable feature: →

P. 449)

180

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)

 Type A

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

is selected).

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

181

 Type B

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

is selected).

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

6 Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

■ Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

182

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)

 Type A

With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

When “AUTO” is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as follows by turning the switch ring.

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

183

 Type B

With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Rain-sensing windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

When “AUTO” is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted as follows by turning the switch ring.

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

184

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■

Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

■

Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield.

● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the engine switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.

● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194°F (90°C) or higher, or

14°F (-10°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

185

WARNING

■

Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

■

Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■

When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

186

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

●

Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.

● Confirm the type of fuel.

■

Fuel types

→

P. 433

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

4-4. Refueling

187

WARNING

■

When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●

After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

●

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

●

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

●

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

●

Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

188

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 With the doors unlocked, press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door.

Push until you hear a click and take your hand away to slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open the door fully by hand.

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to remove it and hang it on the back of the fuel filler door.

■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever to unlock the fuel filler door.

Then press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door to open it.

4-4. Refueling

189

Closing the fuel tank cap

1 After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click.

Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

2 Close the fuel filler door, and press the center of the rear edge of the fuel filler door until you hear a click.

When you lock the doors, the fuel filler door will lock also.

■ Fuel filler door lock condition

The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the following conditions:

● When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle

● When the automatic door locking system is operated ( →

P. 100)

● When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked

WARNING

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

190

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Toyota Safety Sense P

∗

The Toyota Safety Sense P consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

◆

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→

P. 198

◆

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

→

P. 211

◆

Automatic High Beam

→

P. 176

◆

Dynamic radar cruise control

→

P. 222

WARNING

■ Toyota Safety Sense P

The Toyota Safety Sense P is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings and driving safely.

∗

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

191

Vehicle data recordings

The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions

• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)

The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.

● Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency

• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

●

Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.

192

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensors

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

1 Radar sensor 2 Camera sensor

4-5. Using the driving support systems

193

WARNING

■

To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●

Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.

Front grille emblem

Radar sensor

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

●

Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

●

Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●

Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

194

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●

Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install an antenna or attach stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (

→ P. 264)

● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

●

Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.

●

Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not get the camera sensor wet.

● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.

● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Toyota dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

195

WARNING

●

Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.

●

Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.

● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

● Do not install an electronic device or device that emits strong electric waves near the camera sensor.

●

Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

●

If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.

● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

196

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification

4-5. Using the driving support systems

197

198

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

∗

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians * 1

in front of your vehicle.

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( →

P. 202)

* 1

: Depending on the region in which the vehicle was sold, the pedestrian detection function may not be available. See the following table for details.

Countries/areas

Guam, Saipan, Puerto Rico

Function availability

U.S. mainland, Canada,

Hawaii

The pedestrian detection function is available

The pedestrian detection function is not available

Regions

Region A

Region B

∗

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆

Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multiinformation display to urge the driver to take evasive action.

199

◆

Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.

◆

Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

200

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

Limitations of the pre-collision system

● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision:

→ P. 205

• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly:

→ P. 207

● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■ Pre-collision braking

●

When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.

● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.

●

If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

201

WARNING

■

When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●

When the vehicle is being towed

●

When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

●

When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely

●

When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

●

When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons

● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning

● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road

●

When the tires are not properly inflated

●

When the tires are very worn

● When tires of a size other than specified are installed

●

When tire chains are installed

●

When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used

● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle

202

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

■ Disabling the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or more.

The PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

To enable the system, press the

PCS switch again.

The system is enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing

Press the PCS switch to display the current warning timing on the multi-information display.

Each time the PCS switch is pressed with the warning timing displayed, the warning timing will change as follows.

The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off.

Far

The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.

Middle

This is the default setting.

Near

The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

203

■ Operational conditions

Availability of the pedestrian detection function depends on the region in which the vehicle was sold. (For specific countries/areas: →

P. 198)

Read the following for details:

 Region A

(The pedestrian detection function is available)

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

●

Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).

(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and

50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

●

Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h).

(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and

50 mph [30 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h).

(For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and

50 mph [10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

● If the PCS warning light is flashing or illuminated

204

4-5. Using the driving support systems

 Region B

(The pedestrian detection function is not available)

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

● Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 110 mph (15 and 180 km/h).

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h).

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.

● Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 10 and 110 mph (15 and 180 km/h).

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

●

If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

● If the shift lever is in R

● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

●

If the PCS warning light is flashing or illuminated

4-5. Using the driving support systems

205

■ Pedestrian detection function * 2

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (

→

P. 209)

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B ( →

P. 198), the pedestrian detec-

tion function may not be available.

■

Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:

● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

●

The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

■

Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision

●

In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian * 2

• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

206

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating

• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian

* 2

, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside

• When a crossing pedestrian approaches very close to the vehicle

* 2

• When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road

207

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian

* 2

• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B (

→ P. 198), the pedestrian

detection function may not be available.

■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly

●

In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle

• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer

208

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor

• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel

• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/ right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered

209

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

●

In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

●

Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly

* 2

• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians which are close together

• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright

• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings

• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects

210

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road

• Pedestrians who are walking fast

• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly

• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object

• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.)

* 2

: For countries/areas specified as Region B (

→ P. 198), the pedestrian

detection function may not be available.

■ If the PCS warning light flashes and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.

●

In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment

• When the radar sensor or front grille emblem is dirty or covered with snow, etc.

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor

● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or the warning message does not disappear, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ If VSC is disabled

●

If VSC is disabled (

→

P. 252), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision

braking functions are also disabled.

● The PCS warning light will turn on and “Pre-Collision Brake is Disabled Due to VSC OFF” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)

∗

211

Summary of functions

When driving on highways and freeways with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane.

The LDA system recognizes visible white (yellow) lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of the front windshield.

∗

: If equipped

212

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Functions included in LDA system

◆

Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.

◆

Steering control function

When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆

Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying or appears as if it may depart from its lane multiple times, the warning buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.

213

WARNING

■ Before using LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■

To avoid operating LDA system by mistake

When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

214

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.

The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.

● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.

●

Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.

● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

●

Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.

●

White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc., are present due to road repair.

● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

●

Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.

● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.

● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.

● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

●

If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Turning LDA system on

Press the LDA switch to turn the

LDA system on.

The LDA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the LDA switch again to turn the LDA system off.

When the LDA system is turned on or off, operation of the LDA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.

215

216

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Indications on multi-information display

1 LDA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.

Illuminated in white:

LDA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Flashing in orange:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering control function is operating.

Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen.

 Inside of displayed white line is white

 Inside of displayed white line is black

Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.

Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

217

■ Operation conditions of each function

●

Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LDA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).

• No system malfunctions are detected. ( →

P. 220)

● Steering control function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.

• Setting for “ Steering Assist” in “Settings” of the multi-information display is set to “On”. (

→ P. 85)

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. ( →

P. 218)

● Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• Setting for “ Alert” in “Settings” of the multi-information display is set to

“On”. (

→

P. 85)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected. ( →

P. 220)

218

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (

→ P. 217)

■ Steering control function

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.

■

Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

■ Hands off steering wheel alert

When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering control function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.

If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a buzzer sounds, a warning message is displayed. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. However, depending on the road conditions, etc., the function may not cancel.

■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road

The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

219

■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.

●

There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white

(yellow) lines.

● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.

● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●

The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).

● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

●

Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

● The vehicle is driven on a slope.

● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.

● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.

● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.

●

The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.

●

The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).

● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated.

●

The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

●

The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

●

Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

220

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LDA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.

Warning message

“Check LDA System”

“Forward Camera

System

Unavailable

Clean Windshield”

“Forward Camera

System

Unavailable”

“LDA Not Available”

“LDA Unavailable Below

Approx. 32 MPH”

Details/Actions

The system may not be operating properly.

→ Have the vehicle inspected at your

Toyota dealer.

Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor.

→ Turn the LDA system off, remove any dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. from the windshield, and then turn the LDA system back on.

The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.

→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the LDA system will become available. Turn the LDA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LDA system back on.

The LDA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor.

→ Turn the LDA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the

LDA system back on.

The LDA system cannot be used as the vehicle speed is less than approximately 32 mph (50 km/h).

→

Drive the vehicle at approximately

32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Customization

The following settings can be changed.

221

Function

Lane departure alert function

Steering control function

Vehicle sway warning function

Setting details

Adjust alert sensitivity

Turn steering wheel assistance on and off

Turn function on and off

Adjust alert sensitivity

For how to change settings, refer to P. 85.

222

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise control

∗

Summary of functions

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates and decelerates to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control on freeways and highways.

●

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (

→

P. 225)

● Constant speed control mode (

→ P. 230)

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

Display

Indicators

Set speed

Cruise control switch

∗

: If equipped

4-5. Using the driving support systems

223

WARNING

■

Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

The dynamic radar cruise control provides driving assistance to reduce the driver's burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.

Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.

Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■

Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

224

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclers, etc.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to freeways and highways

● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

●

When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor

● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

4-5. Using the driving support systems

225

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-tovehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.

226

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

If the “ON-OFF” button is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (

→ P. 230)

2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 30 mph

[50 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

227

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or down to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

 For the U.S.A

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) * 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) * 2

each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h

(0.6 mph) * 2

increments for as long as the lever is held

 For Canada

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) * 1

or 5 km/h

(3.1 mph)

* 2

increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (

→ P. 230), the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

* 1

or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)

* 2

each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.

* 1

: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

* 2

: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

228

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

Preceding vehicle mark

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options

Long

Medium

Short

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

229

Canceling and resuming the speed control

1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

Pushing the lever up resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.

However, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle.

Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-tovehicle distance.

■ Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.

●

When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed

●

When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

●

Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

●

When depressing the accelerator pedal

230

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Selecting constant speed control mode

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.

With the cruise control off, press and hold the “ON-OFF” button for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the “ON-OFF” button is pressed, the radar cruise control indicator will come on.

Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the lever with the cruise control off.

Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 25 mph

[40 km/h]) and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting:

→ P. 227

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

→ P. 229

4-5. Using the driving support systems

231

■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when

●

The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

●

Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.

●

Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

■

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.

■

Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.

●

Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

●

VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●

When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

●

The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●

Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

● TRAC is activated for a period of time.

● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.

● Pre-collision braking is activated.

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

233

■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (

→ P. 229) may not be activated.

● Vehicles that cut in suddenly

● Vehicles traveling at low speeds

● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane

● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)

● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.

● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow

● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable

● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

4-5. Using the driving support systems

235

Cruise control

∗

Summary of functions

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Display

Indicators

Set speed

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the “ON-OFF” button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will be displayed.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will be displayed.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

∗

: If equipped

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each time the lever is operated

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

1 Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

4-5. Using the driving support systems

237

■ Cruise control can be set when

●

The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

●

Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.

●

Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

●

Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■

Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

●

Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

●

Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

■

If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multiinformation display

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●

In heavy traffic

●

On roads with sharp bends

●

On winding roads

●

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

●

On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● During emergency towing

4-5. Using the driving support systems

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

∗

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;

● The Blind Spot Monitor function

Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes

●

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

239

BSM main switch

Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switch’s indicator illuminates. Common switch for Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.

Outside rear view mirror indicator

Blind Spot Monitor function:

When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

∗

: If equipped

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

3 Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.

■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed:

● There is a malfunction with the sensors

● The sensors have become dirty

Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper.

●

The outside temperature is extremely high or low

●

The sensor voltage has become abnormal

If a message continues to be displayed, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1)This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law : Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Frequency bands : 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Output power : less than 20 milliwatts

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

WARNING

■

Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the

Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly.

● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.

● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Toyota color.

The Blind Spot Monitor function

The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

242

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of the detection area extends to:

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the

Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when

●

The BSM main switch is set to on

●

Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■

The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when

● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

●

Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.

●

Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

●

Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

●

Following vehicles that are in the same lane

●

Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle

* : Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly

● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.

• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.

• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates

• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.

• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle

• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle

• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area

• Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on

●

Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle

• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area

• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse.

It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

1 Approaching vehicles 2 Detection areas

WARNING

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc. before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle

Fast

Slow

Speed

18 mph (28 km/h)

5 mph (8 km/h)

1 Approximate alert distance

65 ft. (20 m)

18 ft. (5.5 m)

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

●

The BSM main switch is set to on.

●

The shift lever is in R.

●

Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

●

Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and

18 mph (28 km/h).

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.

● Vehicles approaching from directly behind

● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects

● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle

● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle

: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

● When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper

● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.

● When multiple vehicles approach continuously

● Shallow angle parking

● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.

● Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on

●

Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switches

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

Normal mode

Use for normal driving.

While in Eco drive mode or sport mode, press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode.

Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

When the “ECO” switch is pressed, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the instrument cluster.

Sport mode

Use sport mode when increased acceleration response and precise handling is desired, for example, when driving on mountain roads.

When the “SPORT” switch is pressed, the “SPORT” indicator comes on in the instrument cluster.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency ( →

P. 260). To improve air

conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.

■

Sport mode automatic deactivation

Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode.

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

◆

TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

◆

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)

→ P. 239

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.

251

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing the switch to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the switch.

The “TRAC OFF” and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to turn the system back on.

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems

To turn the TRAC/VSC systems off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF and “TRAC OFF” and a message will be shown on the multiinformation display

Press the switch again to turn the systems back on.

* : On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and precollision braking will also be disabled. The pre-collision system warning light will come on and the message will be shown on the multi-information display. ( →

P. 210)

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC has been disabled even if the TRAC/VSC OFF switch has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems

●

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■

Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:

●

When the engine switch is turned off

●

If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases

If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The

EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

WARNING

■

The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

●

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

●

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

●

When driving with tire chains

●

When driving over bumps in the road

●

When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■

TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.

Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■

When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■

When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■

Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

4-6. Driving tips

255

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

●

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

●

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

●

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

●

Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

●

Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

256

4-6. Driving tips

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

●

If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift lever cannot be moved out of P * .

* : The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter

0.39 in. (10 mm) in width

1.18 in. (30 mm) in length

Cross chain:

0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter

0.55 in. (14 mm) in width

0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

4-6. Driving tips

257

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

●

Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

●

Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.

●

Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

WARNING

■

Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the specified size.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

●

Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■

Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

●

Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

●

Vehicles with LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system:

Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) system.

258

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■

Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■

Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

Interior features

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system............................. 260

Seat heaters/ seat ventilators................ 269

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................ 272

• Personal/interior light main switch ................... 273

• Personal/ interior lights ................. 273

• Ambient lights ............... 274

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 275

• Glove box...................... 276

• Console box.................. 276

• Cup holders .................. 277

• Auxiliary boxes.............. 278

Trunk features ................... 283

5-4. Other interior features

Other interior features ....... 285

• Sun visors ..................... 285

• Vanity mirrors................ 285

• Clock............................. 286

• Outside temperature display........................... 287

• Power outlets ................ 288

• Armrest ......................... 290

• Rear sunshade ............. 291

• Trunk storage extension ...................... 292

• Coat hooks.................... 293

• Assist grips ................... 293

Garage door opener.......... 294

Safety Connect ................. 301

Compass........................... 307

259

260

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Air conditioning controls

 Front control panel (type A)

 Front control panel (type B)

 Rear control panel (if equipped)

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

261

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

To adjust the temperature setting, touch (driver’s side) to increase the temperature and touch (driver’s side) to decrease the temperature.

The temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (vehicles with a rear control switch) can be adjusted separately when:

• is pressed (the “SYNC” display disappears).

• The front passenger's side temperature control switch is touched

(the front passenger’s side temperature setting is shown).

• Vehicles with a rear control switch: is pressed ( indicator is on and the rear passenger’s temperature setting is shown).

• Vehicles with a rear control switch: is turned ( indicator is on and the rear passenger’s temperature setting is shown).

The air conditioning system switches between individual and synchronized modes each time is touched.

Vehicles with a rear control switch: The rear passenger’s temperature setting switches between individual and synchronized modes each time

is pressed.

262

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Fan speed setting

To adjust the fan speed, touch

and slide your finger toward “+” to increase the fan speed or “-” to decrease the fan speed.

The fan speed can also be adjusted by touching “+” or “-” on

Touch to turn the fan off.

■ Change the airflow mode

To change the airflow mode, press .

The air outlets used are switched each time

 Type A  Type B

is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

■ Changing the rear seat temperature settings (vehicles with a rear control switch)

→

P. 263

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

263

Using the automatic air conditioning system

■ Using automatic operation

1 Touch .

The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Adjust the temperature setting.

3 To stop the operation, touch OFF .

■ Changing the rear seat temperature settings (vehicles with a rear control switch)

Turn clockwise to increase the temperature and turn counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

■ Confirming automatic operation status

During automatic operation, the operation status of fan speed, air outlet mode, outside/recirculated air mode and whether the A/C is on or off can be confirmed on the display by touching .

The display will return to its previous state after a few seconds.

■ Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.

264

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Other functions

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (outside air mode) and culated air mode) each time the button is pressed.

■ Defogging the windshield

(recir-

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press is defogged.

again when the windshield

■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press .

The defoggers will automatically turn off after a period of time.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air outlets

■ Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume change according to the selected airflow mode.

265

■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

 Front center outlets  Front side outlets

 Rear outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close the vent.

266

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

● When the outside temperature exceeds 68°F (20°C), the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is touched.

■

Fogging up of the windows

● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

● If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

●

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■

Outside/recirculated air mode

● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting, outside temperature, pressure, engine coolant temperature or inside temperature.

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on (U.S.A. only)

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

●

It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■

When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32

F (0

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is touched.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

267

■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors

● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• This vehicle is equipped with a deodorizing charcoal air filter. This filter should be inspected and replaced according to the maintenance schedule. (Air conditioning filter: →

P. 358)

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

■ Air conditioning filter

→

P. 358

■

Handling of the air conditioning panel

The operating section of the air conditioning panel uses touch switch sensors.

In the following cases, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.

●

If the surface of the touch switch is dirty or has liquid attached to it, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.

● If the surface of the touch switch receives electromagnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.

● If wearing gloves during operation, non-response may occur.

●

If fingernails are used to operate the system, non-response may occur.

●

If a touch pen is used to operate the system, non-response may occur.

●

If the palm of your hand touches the surface of the touch switch during operation, incorrect operation may occur.

● If the palm of your hand touches the surface of the touch switch, incorrect operation may occur.

●

If operations are performed quickly, non-response may occur.

■

Customization

Settings (e.g. air conditioning setting, touch switch sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features →

P. 449)

268

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

WARNING

■

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

●

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

●

Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.

■ To prevent burns

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Seat heaters

∗

/seat ventilators

∗

269

The seat heaters warm the seats and the seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air through the seats.

WARNING

● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the seats when the heater is on:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

●

Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating

• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

NOTICE

● Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

●

To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is not running.

∗

: If equipped

270

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Front seats

 Vehicles with ventilator

Press the knob to release it, and turn the knob to the desired temperature setting.

OFF

Press the knob to lock it when not in use.

Ventilation

Heat

 Vehicles without ventilator

Press the knob to release it, and turn the knob to the desired temperature setting.

The further you turn the knob clockwise, the warmer the seat temperature becomes. Turn the knob counterclockwise all the way to turn the system off.

Press the knob again to lock it when not in use.

CTY57AX039

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Rear seats

ON/OFF

The indicator illuminates when the seat heater is turned on.

271

■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ Automatic operation of the seat ventilator for the passenger's seat

If a passenger leaves the passenger seat with the seat ventilator on, the seat ventilator will automatically turn off after approximately 10 minutes. If the passenger returns to the seat, it will automatically turn on again.

■ Operation display illumination (if equipped)

1 Illuminates when the ventilator is operating.

2 Illuminates when the front seat heater is operating.

272

5-2. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Outer foot lights (if equipped)

Rear personal/interior lights

(

→

P. 273)

Front personal/interior lights

(

→

P. 273)

Ambient lights (if equipped)

(

→ P. 274)

Front door courtesy lights

5-2. Using the interior lights

Personal/interior light main switch

Turns the lights on/off

Turns the lights on/off linked to door position

273

Personal/interior lights

■ Front

Turns the light on/off

■ Rear

Turns the light on/off

If the lights are turned on by the personal/interior light main switch, the lights cannot turn off by pressing the switch.

274

5-2. Using the interior lights

Ambient lights (if equipped)

Each time the “MOOD” switch is pressed, the brightness level changes.

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.

■

To prevent battery discharge

If the personal/interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

■

Customization

Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features:

→

P. 449)

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

5-3. Using the storage features

List of storage features

275

Auxiliary boxes (

Glove box (

Cup holders

Console box

(

→

P. 277)

P. 276)

WARNING

● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

●

When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

276

5-3. Using the storage features

Glove box

Open (pull up the lever)

Lock with the mechanical key

Unlock with the mechanical key

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (

→

P. 104)

Console box

Lift the lid while pulling up the lever to release the lock.

■ When using the console box lid as an armrest

Slide the console box lid forward as needed. Slide the lid forward while pulling up the lever.

The lid can also be opened from the forwardmost position.

5-3. Using the storage features

■ Tray in the console box

The tray slides forward/backward. To remove the tray slide it forward and lift it.

277

Cup holders

 Front  Rear (type A)

Pull down the armrest.

 Rear (type B)

Pull down the armrest and open the lid.

WARNING

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

278

5-3. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes

 Type A  Type B

Press in the button.

 Type C

Push the lid.

Opening

Push the tray forward until it locks.

Closing

Push the tray forward to release the lock and the tray will automatically close.

5-3. Using the storage features

■ When placing small items on top of the tray

The tray can be opened while small items are placed on it.

279

An electronic device on the tray can be recharged by running a charging cable through the clearance of the tray and connecting it to the AUX/USB port or power outlet underneath the tray.

280

5-3. Using the storage features

■ When using wireless charger (if equipped)

A mobile device can be charged wirelessly on the tray.

Charging can only be performed with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode and only on mobile devices with the “ ” logo.

1 Push the tray forward until it locks and press the wireless charger switch.

2 Push the tray forward to release the lock to close the tray and place a mobile device on the tray as shown in the illustration.

An amber indicator is illuminated while charging is in progress. When charging is complete, a green indicator will also be illuminated.

Some phones, cases or cover type wireless chargers may not cause the green indicator to illuminate even though it is fully charged.

When placing the mobile device on the wireless charging surface of the tray, make sure that there are no objects inbetween the mobile device and the tray.

They may interfere with charging.

■ If the wireless charger LED indicators flash

If the wireless charging surface of the tray becomes too hot, the LED indicators will flash and charging is canceled. The LED indicators will be illuminated if the surface of the tray cools down.

If the LED indicators flash even though the surface of the tray is not hot, the wireless charger may be malfunctioning. Consult your Toyota dealer.

5-3. Using the storage features

281

■ When charging of the wireless charger stops temporarily

If any of the following operations are performed with the electronic key present, charging may stop temporarily. Charging will start again after a while.

●

Locking/unlocking the doors by touching the door handle

● Opening/closing the doors

● Pressing the trunk opener switch

●

Closing the trunk lid

●

Starting the engine

● Locking the doors by pressing the lock button on the electronic key

●

When the electronic key is out of the detection area

■

Certification for the wireless charger

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules.

Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

19001 S. Western Avenue

Torrance, CA 90501

 For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

WARNING

■

Items unsuitable for storing (type B only)

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

282

5-3. Using the storage features

WARNING

■

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices (vehicles with a wireless charger)

●

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the wireless charger.

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

● Before using the wireless charger, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

●

To avoid interference with other electrical devices, turn the wireless charger off by turning off the wireless charger switch.

■ When using wireless charger

Avoid placing metal objects between the wireless charger and the mobile device when charging is active. Doing so may cause metal objects to become hot and could cause burns.

NOTICE

● To prevent damaging small items, when opening the tray while small items are placed on it, make sure the items will not get caught.

● To prevent damaging the tray, do not pull down the tray to close it. Doing so may damage the tray.

●

When on a steep downward incline, the tray can be closed slowly. In this case, the tray can be pulled down to close it.

However, make sure the lock has been released before doing so.

Trunk features

Grocery bag hooks

5-3. Using the storage features

283

Cargo net (if equipped)

284

5-3. Using the storage features

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hooks, do not apply too much load to the hooks.

Other interior features

5-4. Other interior features

Sun visors

1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors

Open the cover to use.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

285

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.

286

5-4. Other interior features

Clock

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

 Type A  Type B

Adjusts the hours

Pressing and holding the button adjusts the hours forward quickly 1 hour at a time.

Adjusts the minutes

Pressing and holding the button adjusts the minutes forward quickly by 1 minute at a time. If the button is pressed and held for 5 seconds or more, the minutes move forward by 5 minutes at a time.

■ The clock is displayed when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

 Type A

The time display will automatically be set to 12:00 AM.

 Type B

The time display will automatically be set to 12:00.

■ Time display (Type B)

After pressing “H” or “M” to show the setting screen, press “H” and “M” at the same time to change between the analog and digital displays.

5-4. Other interior features

287

Outside temperature display

The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40

(-40 ° C) to 122 ° F (50 ° C).

 Type A  Type B

㧲

■ The outside temperature is displayed when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■

Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

●

When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h]).

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

■

When “---

F” is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

288

5-4. Other interior features

Power outlets

The power outlets can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.

■ Console box

■ Instrument panel

 Type A  Type B

■ Rear armrest (if equipped)

5-4. Other interior features

289

■

The power outlets can be used when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

NOTICE

● To avoid damaging the power outlets, close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.

● To prevent blown fuse, do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V

10 A.

● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is off.

290

5-4. Other interior features

Armrest

Fold down the armrest for use.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.

5-4. Other interior features

291

Rear sunshade (if equipped)

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by pressing the switch shown below.

Extends/retracts the rear sunshade

■ The rear sunshade can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■

Reverse operation feature

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if either of the following occurs:

●

The button is pressed again.

●

The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h).

If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button.

■

Customization

Settings (e.g. time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →

P. 449)

WARNING

When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered, do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening. They may get caught, causing injury.

292

5-4. Other interior features

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.

To ensure normal operation of the sunshade, observe the following precautions.

●

Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.

●

Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.

● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.

● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.

Trunk storage extension

Long objects can be loaded into the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear seat area.

Fold down the armrest.

2 Push down the handle and open the armrest door.

The armrest door can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Lock

Unlock

WARNING

■ When not in use

Ensure that the armrest door is closed.

In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into the cabin, resulting in injury.

Coat hooks

The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.

5-4. Other interior features

293

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

294

5-4. Other interior features

Garage door opener

∗

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink



Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink



Programming the HomeLink ® (for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink



compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator light

Buttons

∗

: If equipped

■ Programming the HomeLink



1 Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink

 control buttons.

Keep the indicator light on the

HomeLink



in view while programming.

5-4. Other interior features

2 Press and hold one of the

HomeLink ® buttons and the transmitter button. When the

HomeLink ® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons.

If the HomeLink ® indicator light comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink ® button is already programmed.

Use the other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a Home-

Link ® button” instructions. (

→ P.

299)

295

296

5-4. Other interior features

Test the operation of the

HomeLink

by pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes.

If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the Rolling

Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink ® button.

The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light

(on the HomeLink ® ) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

5-4. Other interior features

297

■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink



” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

Press the training button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink



button for

2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink



transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

298

5-4. Other interior features

■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink



Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink



in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink



button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.

When the indicator light on the HomeLink



compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.

Test the operation of the HomeLink



by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink



buttons.

■ Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Toyota dealer for assistance.

■ Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink



buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic programming” instructions.

5-4. Other interior features

299

Operating the HomeLink ®

Press the appropriate HomeLink



button. The HomeLink



indicator light on the HomeLink



transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink



continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink ® button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink ® button. After 20 seconds, the

HomeLink

indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the

HomeLink

button and press and hold the transmitter button until the

HomeLink ® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.

Release the buttons.

Erasing the entire HomeLink ® memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink



memory.

300

5-4. Other interior features

■ Before programming

●

Install a new battery in the transmitter.

●

The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink



■ Certification for the garage door opener

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

■

For additional programming assistance with your HomeLink ® Universal

Transceiver

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

WARNING

■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink



Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

5-4. Other interior features

301

Safety Connect

∗

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable

Terms and Conditions.

■ System components

Microphone

LED light indicators

“SOS” button

∗

: If equipped

302

5-4. Other interior features

■ Services

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

●

Automatic Collision Notification *

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (

→ P. 304)

: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

●

Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. ( →

P. 305)

● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)

Connects drivers to response-center support. ( →

P. 305)

● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. ( →

P. 305)

■ Subscription

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-331-4331, or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

5-4. Other interior features

303

■ Safety Connect Services Information

●

Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth ® technology will not be possible during Safety Connect.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.

Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and

Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle

Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United

States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than

Canada.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

■

Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.

The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.

Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

304

5-4. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

●

Green indicator light on = Active service

● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process

●

Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction

(contact your Toyota dealer)

● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services

■ Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency.

If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.

5-4. Other interior features

305

■ Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-

331-4331 and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.

■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.

■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the

Enhanced Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at Toyota.com.

306

5-4. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■ Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.

●

ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]

● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

■ Certification for Safety Connect

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101

FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B

FCC ID: N7NGTM2

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5-4. Other interior features

307

Compass

∗

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■ Operation

To turn the compass on or off, press the switch for more than 3 seconds.

■ Displays and directions

Display

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

∗

: If equipped

308

5-4. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

■ Deviation calibration

1 Stop the vehicle.

2 Press and hold the switch.

A number (1 to 15) appears on the compass display.

3 Referring to the map above, press the switch to select the number of the zone you are in.

If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.

5-4. Other interior features

309

■ Circling calibration

When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.

WARNING

■

While driving

Do not adjust the display.

Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■

When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

310

5-4. Other interior features

NOTICE

■

To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

■

To ensure normal operation of the compass

● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

●

During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior.......... 312

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior........... 316

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements ................... 319

General maintenance........ 321

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs......................... 325

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions ..................... 326

Hood ................................. 328

Positioning a floor jack ...... 329

Engine compartment......... 330

Tires .................................. 342

Tire inflation pressure ....... 352

Wheels .............................. 355

Air conditioning filter.......... 358

Electronic key battery........ 360

Checking and replacing fuses ............................... 362

Light bulbs......................... 365

311

312

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

●

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

●

Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

●

Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

■

High pressure car washes

● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

●

Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

6-1. Maintenance and care

313

■ When using a car wash

● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. ( →

P. 113)

■

Aluminum wheels

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.

● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.

● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather

■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

314

6-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

■

When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■

When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.

Off

●

When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

● If something bumps against the windshield

● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor

■

Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■

Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

6-1. Maintenance and care

315

NOTICE

■

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

●

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

●

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

●

To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■

To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

Set the wipers switch to off.

If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

■ When using a high pressure car wash

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

• Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

316

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

●

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas

●

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

●

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●

Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

6-1. Maintenance and care

317

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.

Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged.

WARNING

■

Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

→

P. 36)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■

Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

318

6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■

Cleaning detergents

● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■

Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

●

Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Toyota

Safety Sense P)

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

( →

P. 192)

■

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

●

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

6-2. Maintenance

319

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

320

6-2. Maintenance

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:

Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown. ( →

P. 80)

While pressing the trip meter reset knob (

→

P. 80), turn the engine switch to

IGNITION ON mode

Continue to press and hold the knob until the trip meter displays “000000”.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

●

Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

●

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

■

If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■

Handling of the battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

●

Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

→ P. 338)

6-2. Maintenance

321

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Radiator/condenser

Washer fluid

Check points

Check the battery fluid level and connections.

(

→ P. 338)

Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (

→ P. 337)

Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (

→ P. 334)

Is the engine oil at the correct level?

(

→

P. 331)

There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects.

(

→ P. 336)

Is there sufficient washer fluid?

(

→

P. 341)

322

6-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Check points

• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

Brakes

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?

(

→

P. 430)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?

(

→ P. 430)

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints

Items

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

6-2. Maintenance

323

Check points

• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Moves smoothly?

• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

324

6-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Doors/trunk

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tires

Items

Windshield wipers

Check points

• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?

• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.

• The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

WARNING

■

If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

6-2. Maintenance

325

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

326

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items

Battery condition

( →

P. 338)

Brake fluid level

(

→

P. 337)

• Warm water

Parts and tools

• Baking soda • Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

• Distilled water

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Engine coolant level (

→ P. 334)

Engine oil level

( →

P. 331)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses ( →

P. 362)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs

(

→

P. 365)

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver • Wrench

Radiator and condenser (

→ P. 336)

Tire inflation pressure

(

→

P. 352)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with

55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

⎯

Washer fluid

( →

P. 341)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

327

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■

When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

●

Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

■

When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. ( →

P. 336)

■

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

328

Hood

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.

WARNING

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning a floor jack

329

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆

Front

◆

Rear

330

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment

Engine oil filler cap (

→

P. 332)

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→

P. 331)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 337)

Fuse box (

→

P. 362)

Battery (

→

P. 338)

Radiator (

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (

→

P. 336)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

→

P. 334)

Washer fluid tank ( →

P. 341)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

331

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

332

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection →

P. 427

Oil quantity

(Low → Full)

Items

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

333

WARNING

■

Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

●

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

●

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■

To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

●

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

●

Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

334

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line.

(

→ P. 418)

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31 ° F [-35 ° C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44 ° F [-42 ° C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

335

WARNING

■

When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap or the radiator cap.

(

→

P. 420)

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■

When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

336

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■

When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

“MAX” line

“MIN” line

337

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Clean funnel

■

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

338

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

■

Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

●

If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

339

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1 Shift the shift lever to P.

2 Open and close any of the doors.

3 Restart the engine.

● Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start when the engine switch turned from off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.

● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

■

Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:

●

Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

●

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

●

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

●

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

●

Keep children away from the battery.

340

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■

Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.

■

How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

■

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

●

If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

●

If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

●

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

341

WARNING

■

When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■

Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

342

Tires

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “

” mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

Front

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

343

Tire pressure warning system

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. (

→ P. 391)

● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display.

◆

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (

→ P. 345)

◆

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● When changing the tire size.

●

When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.

●

When rotating the tires.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

344

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

→

P. 431)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

“- -” will be displayed for inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display while the tire pressure warning system determines the position of each tire.

When position of each tire is determined, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed on the multi-information display.

5 Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn the engine switch off.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

345

◆

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

346

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Low profile tires (18-inch tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification

Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. ( →

P. 436)

■ Tire types

● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

→ P. 255)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

347

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

• Tire chains etc. are equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.

• If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

● Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

Vehicles with a tire inflation pressure display function: If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.

● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

348

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ The initialization operation

● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.

● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch to off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to

IGNITION ON mode for the next time.

● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.

● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on.

■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with the conditions under which it was initialized. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization may take longer to complete if the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road. When performing initialization, drive on a paved road if possible. Depending on the driving environment and condition of the tires, initialization will be completed in approximately 10 minutes. If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 10 minutes, continue driving for a while.

If the inflation pressure of each tire is not displayed after driving for approximately 1 hour, perform the following procedure.

● Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 20 minutes.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

349

However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be recorded and the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization again.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

● After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on while driving.

If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: HYQ23AAP

FCC ID: HYQ23AAN

FCC ID: HYQ23AAC

FCC ID: PAXPMVC015

FCC ID: PAXPMVC010

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

NOTE:

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference; and

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

350

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

351

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (

→

P. 343)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ Low profile tires (18-inch tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:

● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

352

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

→

P. 431)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

353

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel economy

● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

● Reduced tire life due to wear

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

354

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Air leaking from between tire and wheel

● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage

● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

355

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset * .

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

●

Wheels of different sizes or types

●

Used wheels

●

Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

●

Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

●

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

356

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.

Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (

→ P. 343)

WARNING

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel nuts

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward.

Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

357

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

358

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box. (

→

P. 276)

Remove the glove box cover.

4 Press the tabs and remove the filter cover.

5 Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “ ↑ UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

359

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Schedule maintenance guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

■

Air conditioning filter deodorizing function

This vehicle is equipped with a deodorizing charcoal air filter to reduce odor from the air conditioning system.

When items or products which emit fragrances or odors are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may be significantly weakened in a short period of time.

If frequent or strong odor comes from your air conditioning system, replace the air conditioning filter.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

360

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

● Flathead screwdriver

●

Small flathead screwdriver

● Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery

1 Take out the mechanical key.

2 Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

3 Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

361

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●

Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

●

Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■

If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

■

Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●

Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

362

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the Fuse box cover.

 Engine compartment  Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Remove the lid.

3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

4 Check if the fuse is blown.

 Type A

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

 Type B

363

 Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C:

Contact your Toyota dealer.

364

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced

●

If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. ( →

P. 365)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

■ When replacing light bulbs

Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

WARNING

■

To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

365

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your

Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. ( →

P. 432)

366

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Bulb locations

■ Front

Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)

Headlight high beam and daytime running light (vehicles with halogen bulbs for low beams)

Headlight high beam (vehicles with discharge bulbs for low beams)

Front turn signal/parking light

■ Rear

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

367

Rear turn signal light

Back-up light

368

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)

1 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.

Turn it clockwise to set.

4 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

369

■ Headlight high beam and daytime running light (vehicles with halogen bulbs for low beams)/Headlight high beam (vehicles with discharge bulbs for low beams)

1 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.

Turn it clockwise to set.

4 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

370

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal/parking light

1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb to be replaced.

Remove the 3 fender liner clips.

Turn the steering wheel to the left when replacing the right side light bulb, and turn the steering wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb.

2 Remove the fender liner bolt and partly remove the fender liner.

3 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

371

5 Remove the light bulb.

6 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

372

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear turn signal light

1 Open the trunk lid and remove the luggage trim cover clip.

2 Pull the hook while depressing the button.

3 Partly remove the luggage trim cover.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

373

5 Remove the light bulb.

6 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

374

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Back-up light

1 Open the trunk lid and remove the clips. Then partly remove the trunk panel cover.

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

3 Remove the light bulb.

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

375

■ Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

●

Headlight low/high beams (LED type)

●

Headlight low beams (discharge bulb type)

●

Daytime running lights (vehicles with discharge or LED headlights)

●

Side marker lights

● Side turn signal lights

● Stop/tail lights

●

High mounted stoplight

●

Outer foot lights (if equipped)

● License plate light

376

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.

■

LED light bulbs

The headlight low/high beams (LED type), parking lights/daytime running lights (vehicles with discharge or LED headlights), side marker lights (vehicles with LED headlights), stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight, outer foot lights and license plate light each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the

LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■

Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations:

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the lens.

■ Removing and installing the clips

The fender liner, luggage trim cover and trunk panel cover clip

Removing

Installing

■ When replacing light bulbs

→

P. 364

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

377

WARNING

■

Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

●

Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

● Vehicles with discharge headlights:

While the low beam headlights are turned on, and for a short time after they have been turned off, metal components at the rear of the headlight assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent burns, do not touch these metal components until you are certain they have cooled down.

Metal components

378

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■

Discharge headlights (if equipped)

● Contact your Toyota dealer before replacing the discharge headlights

(including light bulbs).

●

Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on.

An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in death or serious injury by electric shock.

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.

Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.

■ To prevent damage or fire

●

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

●

Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .......... 380

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency ...................... 381

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed ......................... 382

If you think something is wrong .......................... 386

Fuel pump shut off system ............................ 387

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ............................ 388

If a warning message is displayed......................... 396

If you have a flat tire.......... 397

If the engine will not start ................................. 409

If the electronic key does not operate properly ........................... 411

If the vehicle battery is discharged ...................... 414

If your vehicle overheats ........................ 418

If the vehicle becomes stuck ............................... 421

379

380

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signals will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge.

7-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

381

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

 If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the engine.

 If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

4 To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more or press briefly 3 times or more

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

WARNING

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

382

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/ provincial and local laws.

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

●

The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

383

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

 From the front  From the rear

Release the parking brake.

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

384

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Using a flatbed truck

If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45 ° .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

WARNING

Observe the following precaution.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ When towing the vehicle

Be sure to transport the vehicle with the front wheels raised or with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged.

■ While towing

● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.

● Do not turn the engine switch off.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

385

NOTICE

■

To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

●

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

●

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■

To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

386

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

●

Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

●

Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.

Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

●

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

●

Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

●

Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

● Appreciable loss of power

●

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

●

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Fuel pump shut off system

387

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

388

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details/Actions

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

* 1

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake booster system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

→

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The electronic automatic transmission control system

→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

389

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system

→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

PCS warning light

• When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer sounds):

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)

→

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

• When the warning light flashes (and a buzzer does not sound):

Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to either of the following:

• An area around the radar sensor or camera sensor being dirty or covered with condensation, ice, stickers, etc.

→ Clear the dirt, condensation, ice, stickers, etc.

(

→

P. 193, 194)

• Radar sensor or camera sensor operational conditions

(such as temperature etc.) being not met

→ Driving is possible in this case. The PCS (Pre-Collision System) will be enabled if the operational conditions (such as temperature etc.) are met again.

• When the warning light is illuminated:

Either the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system or PCS

(Pre-Collision System) is disabled or both are disabled.

→ To enable the PCS, enable both the VSC system and

PCS. (

→

P. 202, 252)

390

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(Amber)

(If equipped)

Warning light/Details/Actions

LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) indicator

Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control )

The light will flash when the LDA system is operating.

→

P. 220

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system; or

• The TRAC (Traction Control) system

The light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC system is operating.

→

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Open door warning light (warning buzzer) * 2

Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed

→ Check that all the doors and the trunk are closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7 L,

2.1 Imp. gal.) or less

→

Refuel the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)

* 3

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

→

Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) off.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

391

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

→

P. 396

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

• Natural causes (

→

P. 392)

• Flat tire ( →

P. 397)

→

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

→

Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

* 1

: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

* 2

: Open door warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or more with any door open.

* 3

: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of

12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

392

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners (front), airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

(

→

P. 36)

■

Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

■

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

●

Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

393

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.

Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

→ P. 347

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

WARNING

■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the

ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

394

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

395

WARNING

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

396

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, messages that indicate a need for maintenance and reminder messages. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multiinformation display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning message is shown again after its correction procedure has been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

■

Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

397

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

For details about tires:

→

P. 342

WARNING

■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

●

Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P.

●

Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers. ( →

P. 380)

398

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Luggage floor cover

Jack

Jack handle

Spare tire

Tool tray

Wheel nut wrench

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

399

WARNING

■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

400

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and jack handle

1 Remove the luggage floor cover.

2 Remove the jack.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire

Remove the luggage floor cover. (

→

P. 400)

Remove the tool tray.

401

3 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

WARNING

■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

402

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

3 Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

CTY72AX057

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

403

5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

WARNING

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103

N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (

→

P. 356)

404

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

3 Lower the vehicle.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

405

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

5 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

406

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ The compact spare tire

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(

→

P. 431)

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

→ P. 344)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■ When the compact spare tire is equipped

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.

Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.

2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.

3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

407

WARNING

■ When using the compact spare tire

● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, as well as sudden braking and shifting operation to engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist

• VSC

• TRAC

• Cruise control (if equipped)

• Dynamic radar cruise control

(if equipped)

• PCS (if equipped)

• EPS

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) (if equipped)

• Automatic High Beam

(if equipped)

• Tire pressure warning system

• Rear view monitor system

(if equipped)

• Navigation system (if equipped)

■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

408

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle.

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

→

P. 343)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

409

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( →

P. 160), consider each of the follow-

ing points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.

(

→

P. 160)

●

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(

→

P. 68)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●

The battery may be discharged. (

→

P. 414)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse.

However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.

(

→ P. 410)

410

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●

One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (

→ P. 414)

●

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally:

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly

411

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (

→

P. 114) or the electronic key cannot be used

because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors and unlocking the trunk

■ Doors

Use the mechanical key ( →

93) in order to perform the fol-

lowing operations:

Locks all the doors

Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver’s door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.

■ Trunk

→

P. 106

412

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the engine

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.

The engine switch will turn to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to

ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

A message indicating how to start the engine will be displayed on the multi-information display.

Press the engine switch.

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

413

■ Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.

(

→

P. 360)

■

Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step 3 above.

The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed.( →

P. 161)

■ When the electronic key does not work properly

●

Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.

(Customizable features

→

P. 449)

●

Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function.

(

→ P. 113)

414

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked. (

→

P. 71)

Open the hood ( →

P. 328)

Remove the engine cover.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

415

Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.

Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

5 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

6 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.

7 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION

ON mode.

8 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

416

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■

To prevent battery discharge

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■

Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

■ When recharging or replacing the battery

●

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

●

The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.

If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

417

WARNING

■

Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

●

Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

●

When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

●

Do not lean over the battery.

●

In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

●

Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or engine drive belt.

418

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:

●

The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (

→

P. 79)

enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced.

(For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

●

“Engine Coolant Temp is High” is shown on the multi-information display.

● Steam comes out from under the hood.

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fan

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer.

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Radiator cap

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

5 Add engine coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable.

419

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

420

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

■

When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

●

If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

● Do not use any coolant additive.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

421

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press to turn off TRAC.

WARNING

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

422

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■

To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.

●

If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) .......... 424

Fuel information ................ 433

Tire information ................. 436

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 449

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize ............... 457

423

424

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Front

Tread

Rear

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage)

: Unladen vehicle

195.3 in. (4960 mm)

72.2 in. (1835 mm)

57.5 in. (1460 mm)

111.0 in. (2820 mm)

62.6 in. (1590 mm)

62.2 in. (1580 mm)

930 lb. (420 kg)

8-1. Specifications

425

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is located on the top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

426

8-1. Specifications

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Valve clearance

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane Rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

3.5L 6-cylinder (2GR-FE)

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.70

3.27 in. (94.0

83.0 mm)

210.9 cu. in. (3456 cm

)

Automatic adjustment

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

Drain and refill

(Reference

)

With filter

Without filter

6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp. qt.)

6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)

: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

8-1. Specifications

427

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use

Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,

SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.

However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

How to read oil container label

Outside temperature

The International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

428

8-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

Coolant type

9.7 qt. (9.2 L, 8.1 Imp. qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO FK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

8-1. Specifications

429

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage at 68 ° F

(20

C):

Charging rates

12.6

⎯

12.8 V Fully charged

12.2

⎯

12.4 V Half charged

11.8

⎯

12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all lights are turned off.)

5 A max.

Automatic transaxle

Fluid capacity

6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.

If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■

Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

430

8-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance

Pedal free play

* 1

Brake pad wear limit

Parking brake lining wear limit

Parking brake pedal travel

* 2

Fluid type

3.54 in. (90 mm) Min.

0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1.0 ⎯ 6.0 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

⎯

10 clicks

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N,

51 kgf) while the engine is running

* 2

: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67 lbf (300 N,

30.6 kgf).

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

8-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels

 Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P215/55R17 93V

Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

7 J

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

 Type B

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P225/45R18 91V

Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

7 1/2 J

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

 Compact spare tire

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

T155/70D17 110M

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

or bar)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

17 × 4 T

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

431

432

8-1. Specifications

Light bulbs * 1

Exterior

Interior

High beam

Light bulbs

Headlights

Low beam (discharge bulbs)

* 2

Low beam (halogen bulbs) * 2

Bulb No.

⎯

9005

Front turn signal/parking lights 7444NA 28/8

Side marker lights (bulb type)

* 2

W5W 5

Side turn signal lights WY5W 5

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

Interior/front personal lights

Interior/rear personal lights

Vanity lights

Door courtesy lights

Trunk light

921

W6W

⎯

7065

168

194

1.4

3.8

A: D4S discharge bulbs

B: HB3L+ halogen bulbs

C: HB3 halogen bulbs

D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

F: Double end bulbs

* 1

: Light bulbs not listed in this table are LED bulbs.

* 2

: If equipped

Type

8-1. Specifications

433

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A..

■

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Gasoline quality standards

●

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.

●

The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

434

8-1. Specifications

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.

●

All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program.

●

Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■

Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.

Toyota recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.

■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled

E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than

15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol.

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

8-1. Specifications

435

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

●

Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■

When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

436

8-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

 Full-size tire

 Compact spare tire

8-1. Specifications

437

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Uniform tire quality grading

(

→

P. 439)

P. 438)

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Location of treadwear indicators

Tire ply composition and materials

(

→

P. 342)

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

6 Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.

7 TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire.

A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(

→

P. 443)

(

→ P. 443)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Summer tires or all season tires (

→ P. 346)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE

ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

438

8-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

 Type A  Type B

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

8 Manufacturer's code

* : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

8-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use (P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

439

440

8-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

8-1. Specifications

441

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

442

8-1. Specifications

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

8-1. Specifications

443

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment

(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 * that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below

444

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Production options weight

Rim

Meaning

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Weather side

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 * below), and dividing by two

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead

Bead separation

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

8-1. Specifications

445

Tire related term

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

Meaning

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

446

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Light truck (LT) tire

Meaning

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

Maximum load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

8-1. Specifications

447

Tire related term

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Test rim

Meaning

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

448

8-1. Specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front,

1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat,

1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat,

1 in fourth seat

8-2. Customization

449

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed on the audio system screen or at your

Toyota dealer.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Customizing vehicle features

It is possible to customize certain vehicle features using the audio system.

Press the “APPS” button.

Select “Setup” on the “Apps” screen and select “Vehicle”.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.

450

8-2. Customization

Customizable Features

1 Vehicles with an audio system: Settings that can be changed using the audio system

2 Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

■ Smart key system and wireless remote control (

→ P. 92

108)

Function Default setting

Customized setting

1 2

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Operation signal

(Buzzer)

Operation buzzer volume

Level 5

Off

Off to level 7

O O

— O

O O

Off

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds 30 seconds O O

120 seconds

Off — O Open door warning buzzer

■ Smart key system ( →

P. 108)

Function

Default setting

Smart key system

Number of permissible times of continuous smart lock

Twice

Customized setting

Off

1 2

— O

Unlimited — O

8-2. Customization

■ Wireless remote control (

→ P. 92, 97, 103)

Function

Wireless remote control

Unlocking operation

Panic function

Trunk unlocking operation

451

Default setting

Customized setting

Off

1 2

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

On Off

Off

— O

All doors unlocked in one step.

O O

— O

Press and hold

(short)

Press twice

One short press

Press and hold

(long)

— O

■ Door lock ( →

P. 97)

Function

Unlocking using a key

Default setting

Customized setting

1 2

Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps

All doors unlocked in one step.

— O

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Opening driver's door unlocks all doors

Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors.

Shifting gears to position other than P locks all doors.

Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked

Off

O O

— O

452

8-2. Customization

■ Trunk ( →

P. 103)

Function Default setting

Trunk opener main switch Activated

■ Driving position memory * (

→

P. 120)

Function Default setting

Driver’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle

Full

Doors linked to the driving position memory recall function

: If equipped

■ Engine switch ( →

P. 160)

Driver’s door

Function Default setting

Time elapsed before the engine switch related messages on the multiinformation display turn off

■ Turn signal lever ( →

P. 171)

60 seconds

Function Default setting

Times of flashing of the lane change signal flashers

Customized setting

Deactivated

1 2

— O

Customized setting

Off

Partial

1 2

O O

All doors — O

Customized setting

30 seconds

1 2

— O

600 seconds

Customized setting

Off

1 2

— O

8-2. Customization

■ Automatic light control system ( →

P. 173)

Function

Light sensor sensitivity

Default setting

Level 3

Customized setting

Level 1 to 5

0 seconds

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

30 seconds 60 seconds

90 seconds

■ Lights (

→

P. 173, 176)

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Daytime running light system (except Canada)

Automatic high beam

: If equipped

Off

453

1 2

O O

1 2

O O

— O

454

8-2. Customization

■ Illumination (

→ P. 272)

Function

Interior lights illumination control

Default setting

Time elapsed before interior lights turn off

Center console spot light

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation after the engine switch turned off

Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Ambient lights

Outer foot lights

15 seconds

Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off

15 seconds

Customized setting

Off

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Off

1 2

— O

O O

— O

Off — O

Off

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

— O

O O

Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person

Enable/disable operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch *

: If equipped

Off

— O

8-2. Customization

■ Instrument panel ( →

P. 81)

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Instrument panel light auto dimmer control

Level 3 Level 1 to 5

■ Automatic air conditioning system (

→ P. 260)

Function Default setting

A/C auto switch operation Auto

■ Touch switch (on the audio panel) (

→ P. 89)

Customized setting

Manual

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Level 1 to 3 Touch switch sensitivity Level 3

■ Touch switch (on the air conditioning panel) (

→ P. 260)

Function Default setting

Customized setting

Level 1 to 3 Touch switch sensitivity

■ Rear sunshade * (

→

P. 291)

Level 1

455

1 2

— O

1 2

O O

1 2

O —

1 2

— O

Function

Reverse operation

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates

Default setting

0.7 seconds

Customized setting

Off

0 second

0.9 seconds

1.2 seconds

1 2

— O

* : If equipped

WARNING

■ During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

456

8-2. Customization

NOTICE

■

During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

8-3. Items to initialize

457

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item When to initialize

Message indicating maintenance is required

• After the maintenance is performed

Tire pressure warning system

• When changing the tire size

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

Reference

P. 320

P. 344

458

8-3. Items to initialize

For owners

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners ............................. 460

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 461

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners

(in French) ............................... 463

459

460

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-

331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

461

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité

● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu’elle passe bien sur l’épaule, sans pour autant

être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l’épaule.

●

Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

● Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le siège.

●

Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

Entretien et soin

■ Ceintures de sécurité

Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas usées, effilochées ou entaillées excessivement.

462

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité

Inspectez le système de ceintures de sécurité régulièrement. Contrôlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée.

Une ceinture de sécurité endommagée ne permet pas de protéger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.

463

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

◆

Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS

Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant SRS

Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle

Coussins gonflables de genoux SRS

Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant

464

◆

Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant

Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS

Participent à la protection du torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière

Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS

●

Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux

●

Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d'être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneau

Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

465

Capteurs d'impact avant

Coussins gonflables de genoux

Capteurs d'impact latéral

(portes avant)

Prétensionneurs de ceintures de sécurité et limiteurs de force

Coussin gonflable passager avant

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant

Coussins gonflables rideaux

Témoins indicateurs “AIR

BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”

9 Capteurs d'impact latéral

(avant)

10 Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière

11 Capteurs d'impact latéral

(arrière)

Coussin gonflable conducteur

Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur

Témoin d'avertissement SRS

Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant

16 Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et capteurs)

17 Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables

466

Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLI-

GENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système.

Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.

467

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables

SRS.

Le non-respect de ces précautions peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de sécurité.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec les ceintures de sécurité.

●

Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se déploie avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:

La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:

• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.

Bien que les véhicules aient une conception différente, un grand nombre de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le siège si votre véhicule est équipé de cette fonction.

• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.

Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

468

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, sans l'attacher au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS déterminent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, bien que la ceinture de sécurité ne soit pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables frontaux

SRS peuvent ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS se déploie également avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable en réglant le dossier de siège de façon à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans le siège.

● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement attaché au moyen d'un siège de sécurité enfant. Toyota recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.

●

Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.

●

Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur les sièges passagers en appui contre la porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que la planche de bord, la garniture du volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.

Ces éléments peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur, passager avant et genoux SRS se déploient.

● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.

469

470

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

●

Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet dur aux crochets à vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables rideaux SRS.

● Si un cache en vinyle est placé sur la zone où le coussin gonflable de genoux SRS se déploie, assurez-vous de le retirer.

●

N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège recouvrant les zones de déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS, car il risque de gêner le déploiement des coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le système ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants de coussins gonflables SRS.

En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

●

Ne touchez aucun composant immédiatement après le déploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.

● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger.

Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.

●

Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures du volant et des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.

● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS du passager avant risquent de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.

471

AVERTISSEMENT

■

Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et ne procédez à aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.

● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables

SRS

●

Réparations, modifications, dépose ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit

● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle

●

Installation d'un protège-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils, ou d'un porte-bagages de toit

● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule

●

Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que les émetteurs/récepteurs radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD

● Modifications de votre véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique

472

473

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) .................... 474

Alphabetical index ..................... 478

For details of equipment related to the audio/navigation system, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL”.

474

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

●

If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. ( →

P. 93)

●

If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (

→

P. 96)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

●

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (

→

P. 360)

●

Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. ( →

P. 161)

●

Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

●

The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (

→ P. 114)

The rear door cannot be opened

●

Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( →

P. 100)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside

●

The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. ( →

P. 105)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

475

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

●

Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?

(

→ P. 160)

●

Is the shift lever in P? (

→ P. 162)

●

Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (

→

P. 109)

●

Is the steering wheel unlocked? (

→

P. 163)

●

Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (

→ P. 412)

●

Is the battery discharged? (

→

P. 414)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

●

Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode (

→

P. 169)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped

●

It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (

→

P. 162)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

●

Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. ( →

P. 135)

The engine switch is turned off automatically

●

The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of time. (

→ P. 162)

476

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

●

The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?

(

→

P. 390)

●

The brake system warning light is on

Is the parking brake released? (

→ P. 172)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. (

→

P. 388, 396)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

●

Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (

→

P. 70)

To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the engine.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

●

Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?

Check the message on the multi-information display.

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

●

When a warning light turns on, refer to P. 388.

●

When a warning message is displayed, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

477

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

●

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (

→

P. 397)

The vehicle becomes stuck

●

Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (

→

P. 421)

478

Alphabetical index

A/C ............................................ 260

Air conditioning filter ............. 358

Automatic air conditioning

ABS

system ................................ 260

(Anti-lock Brake System)...... 250

Function ................................ 250

Warning light......................... 389

Air conditioning filter .............. 358

Air conditioning system.......... 260

Air conditioning filter ............. 358

Air conditioning system......... 260

Airbags ....................................... 34

Airbag operating conditions .... 42

Airbag precautions

for your child......................... 37

Airbag warning light .............. 389

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ............. 42

Curtain shield airbag

precautions........................... 39

Front passenger occupant

classification system............. 46

General airbag precautions .... 37

Locations of airbags................ 34

Modification and disposal

of airbags.............................. 41

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................. 42

Side airbag precautions .......... 37

Side and curtain shield airbags

operating conditions ............. 42

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions .............. 37

SRS airbags............................ 34

Alarm .......................................... 70

Alarm ...................................... 70

Warning buzzer .................... 388

Anchor brackets ........................ 57

Antennas

(smart key system) ............... 108

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) ...................................... 250

Function................................ 250

Warning light......................... 389

Approach warning (dynamic

radar cruise control) ............. 229

Armrest..................................... 290

Armrest door............................ 292

Assist grips.............................. 293

Audio system

Automatic headlight leveling

system.................................... 175

Automatic high beam.............. 176

Automatic light control

system.................................... 173

Automatic transmission ......... 165

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................ 169

Paddle shift switches ............ 166

S mode ................................. 166

AUX port

Auxiliary boxes........................ 278

Alphabetical index

479

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 374

Wattage ................................ 432

Battery ...................................... 338

Battery checking ................... 338

If the vehicle battery

is discharged ...................... 414

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 255

Warning light......................... 388

Brake

Fluid ...................................... 337

Parking brake........................ 172

Warning light......................... 388

Brake assist ............................. 250

Break-in tips............................. 146

Brightness control

Instrument panel light

control................................... 80

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ....... 239

Care .................................. 312, 316

Aluminum wheels ................. 313

Exterior ................................. 312

Interior .................................. 316

Seat belts.............................. 317

Cargo capacity......................... 157

Cargo net.................................. 283

Chains ...................................... 256

Child restraint system............... 53

Booster seats, definition ......... 54

Booster seats, installation....... 63

Convertible seats, definition ... 54

Convertible seats,

installation ............................ 60

Front passenger occupant

classification system ............ 46

Infant seats, definition............. 54

Infant seats, installation .......... 60

Installing CRS

with LATCH anchors ............ 58

Installing CRS with seat

belts...................................... 60

Installing CRS

with top tether strap.............. 64

* : Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

480

Alphabetical index

Child safety ................................ 52

Airbag precautions.................. 37

Battery precautions....... 339, 417

Child restraint system ............. 53

How your child should

wear the seat belt ................. 30

Installing child restraints ......... 57

Moon roof precautions .......... 141

Power window lock switch .... 135

Power window precautions ... 137

Rear door child-protectors .... 100

Removed electronic

key battery precautions ...... 361

Seat belt extender

precautions........................... 33

Seat belt precautions .............. 56

Seat heater precautions........ 269

Trunk precautions ................. 106

Child-protectors....................... 100

Cleaning ........................... 312, 316

Aluminum wheels.................. 313

Exterior ................................. 312

Interior................................... 316

Seat belts.............................. 317

Clock......................................... 286

Coat hooks ............................... 293

Compass .................................. 307

Condenser................................ 336

Console box ............................. 276

Cooling system

Engine overheating............... 418

Cruise control

Cruise control ....................... 235

Dynamic radar cruise

control ................................ 222

Cup holders ............................. 277

Curtain shield airbags............... 35

Customizable features ............ 449

Daytime running light

system.................................... 174

Defogger

Front windshield ................... 264

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 264

Rear window......................... 264

Dimension ................................ 424

Dinghy towing.......................... 159

Display

Cruise control ....................... 235

Dynamic radar cruise

control ................................ 222

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) .......... 211

Multi-information display......... 82

Trip information....................... 83

Warning message................. 396

Alphabetical index

481

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 326

Door courtesy lights

Wattage ................................ 432

Doors .......................................... 97

Automatic door locking

and unlocking system......... 100

Door glasses......................... 135

Door lock................................. 99

Open door warning buzzer ... 110

Open door warning light........ 390

Outside rear view mirrors...... 132

Rear door child-protector ...... 100

Driver’s seat position

memory .................................. 121

Driving ...................................... 144

Break-in tips.......................... 146

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Driving mode select switch ... 248

Procedures ........................... 144

Winter drive tips .................... 255

Dynamic radar cruise

control .................................... 222

Eco Drive Indicator.................... 81

Eco drive mode........................ 248

EDR (Event data recorder)........ 10

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) ...................................... 250

Function................................ 250

Warning light......................... 389

Electronic key ............................ 92

Battery-saving function ......... 113

If the electronic key does not

operate properly ................. 411

Replacing the battery............ 360

Emergency flashers ................ 380

Emergency, in case of

If the electronic key does not operate

properly .............................. 411

If the engine will not start...... 409

If the trunk opener is not

actuated ............................. 106

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.......................... 414

If the warning buzzer

sounds................................ 388

482

Alphabetical index

If the warning light turns

on ....................................... 388

If the warning message

is displayed......................... 396

If you have a flat tire ............. 397

If you think something

is wrong .............................. 386

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 421

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ... 381

If your vehicle needs

to be towed......................... 382

If your vehicle overheats....... 418

Engine

ACCESSORY mode ............. 161

Compartment ........................ 330

Engine switch........................ 160

Hood ..................................... 328

How to start the engine......... 160

Identification number ............ 425

If the engine will not start ...... 409

Ignition switch

(engine switch) ................... 160

Overheating .......................... 418

Engine coolant......................... 334

Capacity................................ 428

Checking............................... 334

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 255

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ....................................... 79

Engine immobilizer system ...... 68

Engine oil ................................. 331

Capacity................................ 426

Checking............................... 331

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 255

Engine switch .......................... 160

EPS

(Electronic Power

Steering) ................................ 250

Function................................ 250

Warning light......................... 389

Event data recorder (EDR)........ 10

Alphabetical index

483

Flat tire...................................... 397

Floor mats .................................. 24

Fluid

Automatic transmission......... 429

Brake .................................... 430

Washer ................................. 341

Front passenger occupant

classification system .............. 46

Front personal lights............... 273

Front seats ............................... 119

Adjustment............................ 119

Cleaning................................ 316

Correct driving posture ........... 26

Driving position memory ....... 121

Head restraints ..................... 126

Power easy access

system ................................ 120

Seat heaters ......................... 269

Seat position memory ........... 121

Seat ventilators ..................... 269

Front side marker lights.......... 173

Light switch ........................... 173

Replacing light bulbs............. 375

Front turn signal lights ........... 171

Replacing light bulbs ............ 370

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Wattage ................................ 432

Fuel ........................................... 426

Capacity................................ 426

Fuel gauge.............................. 79

Fuel pump shut off system ... 387

Information............................ 433

Refueling .............................. 186

Type...................................... 426

Warning light......................... 390

Fuel filler door ......................... 186

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened .............. 188

Refueling .............................. 186

Fuel pump shut off system..... 387

Fuses ........................................ 362

Garage door opener ................ 294

Gauges ....................................... 79

Glove box ................................. 276

Grocery bag hooks.................. 283

484

Alphabetical index

Head restraints ........................ 126

Headlights ................................ 173

Automatic high beam ............ 176

Discharge headlights

precautions......................... 378

Light switch ........................... 173

Replacing light

bulbs................... 368, 369, 375

Wattage ................................ 432

Heaters

Air conditioning system......... 260

Outside rear view mirrors...... 264

Seat heaters ......................... 269

Hood ......................................... 328

Hooks

Coat hooks............................ 293

Grocery bag hooks ............... 283

Retaining hooks (floor mat)..... 24

Horn .......................................... 128

I/M test ...................................... 325

Identification

Engine .................................. 425

Vehicle.................................. 425

Ignition switch

(engine switch)...................... 160

Illuminated entry system ........ 274

Immobilizer system ................... 68

Indicators ................................... 77

Initialization

Maintenance ......................... 320

Tire pressure

warning system .................. 343

Inside rear view mirror............ 130

Instrument panel light

control...................................... 80

Interior lights ........................... 272

Jack

Positioning a floor jack.......... 329

Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 398

Jack handle.............................. 398

Jam protection function

Moon roof ............................. 139

Power windows..................... 136

Alphabetical index

485

Keyless entry

Smart key system ........... 97, 103

Wireless remote

control........................... 97, 103

Keys ............................................ 92

Battery-saving function ......... 113

Electronic key ......................... 92

Engine switch........................ 160

If the electronic key does not operate

properly .............................. 411

Key number plate.................... 92

Keyless entry .......................... 92

Mechanical key ....................... 93

Replacing the battery............ 360

Warning buzzer..................... 110

Wireless remote control

key........................................ 92

Knee airbags .............................. 34

Lane Departure Alert with

steering control (LDA) ......... 211

Language

(multi-information display)..... 85

LATCH anchors ......................... 58

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control)............ 211

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever.............. 328

Hood lock release lever ........ 328

Internal trunk release lever ... 105

Shift lever.............................. 165

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Wiper lever............................ 180

License plate lights ................. 173

Light switch........................... 173

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................. 368

Wattage ................................ 432

Lights

Automatic high beam............ 176

Headlight switch ................... 173

Illuminated entry system....... 274

Interior light........................... 273

Interior lights list.................... 272

Personal lights ...................... 273

Replacing light bulbs ............ 368

Trunk light............................. 105

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Vanity lights .......................... 285

Wattage ................................ 432

Load capacity .......................... 157

Lock steering column ............. 162

Low profile tire......................... 346

Luggage hook.......................... 283

Luggage net ............................. 283

Luggage security system ....... 104

486

Alphabetical index

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 326

General maintenance ........... 321

Maintenance data ................. 424

Maintenance requirements ... 319

Resetting the message indicating maintenance

is required........................... 320

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 388

Master warning light................ 391

Meter ........................................... 79

Indicators ................................ 77

Instrument panel light

control................................... 80

Meters..................................... 79

Multi-information display ......... 82

Warning lights ......................... 75

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror .......... 130

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers ........................... 264

Outside rear view mirrors...... 132

Vanity mirrors........................ 285

Moon roof ................................. 138

Jam protection function......... 139

Operation .............................. 138

Multi-information display.......... 82

Cruise control........................ 235

Dynamic radar cruise

control................................. 222

Language................................ 85

Switching the display .............. 83

Trip information....................... 83

Warning message................. 396

Navigation system

Noise from under vehicle ........... 8

Odometer ................................... 79

Oil

Engine oil.............................. 426

Opener

Hood ..................................... 328

Trunk .................................... 103

Outer foot lights ...................... 272

Outside rear view mirrors....... 132

Adjusting and folding ............ 132

Blind spot monitor................. 239

Linked mirror function

when reversing................... 133

Mirror position memory......... 121

Outside rear view

mirror defoggers................. 264

Overheating, Engine ............... 418

Alphabetical index

487

Paddle shift switches .............. 166

Parking brake........................... 172

Operation .............................. 172

Parking brake engaged

warning buzzer ................... 388

Parking lights........................... 173

Light switch ........................... 173

Replacing light bulbs............. 370

PCS (Pre-Collision System).... 198

Function ................................ 198

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) switch ................... 202

Warning light......................... 389

Personal lights......................... 273

Power easy access system .... 120

Power outlets ........................... 288

Power steering (Electric

Power Steering system) ....... 250

Warning light......................... 389

Power windows........................ 135

Jam protection function......... 136

Operation .............................. 135

Window lock switch............... 135

Pre-Collision System (PCS).... 198

Function ................................ 198

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) switch .................. 202

Warning light......................... 389

Radar cruise control (dynamic

radar cruise control) ............. 222

Radiator.................................... 336

Rear personal lights................ 273

Rear seat heaters .................... 269

Rear sunshade......................... 291

Rear turn signal lights ............ 171

Replacing light bulbs ............ 372

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Wattage ................................ 432

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror .......... 130

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 132

Rear view monitor system

Rear window defoggers.......... 264

Refueling .................................. 186

Capacity................................ 426

Fuel types ............................. 426

If the fuel filler door

cannot be opened .............. 188

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 188

Replacing

Electronic key battery ........... 360

Fuses.................................... 362

Light bulbs ............................ 365

Tires...................................... 397

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners...................... 460

Resetting the message indicating maintenance

is required.............................. 320

* : Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

488

Alphabetical index

Safety Connect ........................ 301

Seat belts.................................... 28

Adjusting the seat belt ............ 29

Automatic Locking

Retractor............................... 30

Child restraint system

installation ............................ 60

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belt........................ 317

Emergency Locking

Retractor............................... 30

How to wear your seat belt ..... 28

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................... 30

Pregnant women, proper

seat belt use ......................... 31

Reminder light and buzzer.... 390

Seat belt extender................... 30

Seat belt pretensioners........... 29

SRS warning light ................. 389

Seat heaters ............................. 269

Seat position memory ............. 121

Seat ventilators........................ 269

Seating capacity ...................... 157

Seats ......................................... 119

Adjustment............................ 119

Adjustment precautions ........ 120

Child seats/child restraint

system installation ................ 57

Cleaning................................ 316

Driving position memory ....... 121

Head restraints ..................... 126

Power easy access

system ................................ 120

Properly sitting in the seat ...... 26

Seat heaters ......................... 269

Seat position memory ........... 121

Seat ventilators ..................... 269

Sensor

Automatic headlight

system................................ 174

Automatic high beam............ 176

Camera sensor ............. 192, 194

Inside rear view mirror .......... 131

Radar sensor ........ 192, 193, 241

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers................................. 184

Service reminder indicators ..... 74

Shift lever ................................. 165

Automatic transmission ........ 165

If the shift lever

cannot be shifted from P .... 169

Shift lock system..................... 168

Side airbags ............................... 35

Side marker lights ................... 173

Light switch........................... 173

Replacing light bulbs ............ 375

Side mirrors ............................. 132

Adjusting and folding ............ 132

Blind Spot Monitor ................ 239

Linked mirror function

when reversing................... 133

Mirror position memory......... 121

Side turn signal lights............. 171

Replacing light bulbs ............ 375

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Smart key system.................... 108

Antenna location................... 108

Entry functions................ 97, 103

Starting the engine ............... 160

Snow tires ................................ 257

Spare tire.................................. 397

Inflation pressure .................. 431

Storage location.................... 398

Spark plug................................ 428

Specifications .......................... 424

Speedometer.............................. 79

Steering lock............................ 162

Column lock release ............. 163

Steering wheel ......................... 128

Stop lights

Replacing light bulbs ............ 375

Alphabetical index

489

Storage feature ........................ 275

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 421

Sun shade

Rear ...................................... 291

Roof ...................................... 139

Sun visors ................................ 285

Switches

BSM (Blind spot monitor)

switch ................................. 239

Compass switch.................... 307

Cruise control switch............. 235

“DISP” button .......................... 83

Door lock switches.................. 99

Driving mode select switch ... 248

Driving position memory

switches.............................. 121

Dynamic radar cruise

control switch...................... 222

Emergency flashers switch ... 380

Engine switch........................ 160

Garage door opener

switches.............................. 294

Ignition switch ....................... 160

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) .......... 211

Light switches ....................... 173

Moon roof switches............... 138

Outside rear view mirror

switches.............................. 132

Paddle shift switches ............ 166

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) switch ................... 202

Power door lock switch ........... 99

Power window switches........ 135

Rear sunshade switch .......... 291

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

switch ................................. 264

Seat heater switches ............ 269

Seat ventilator switches ........ 269

“SOS” button......................... 301

Tire pressure warning reset

switch ................................. 344

Trunk opener main switch .... 104

Trunk opener switch ............. 103

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

button ................................. 222

VSC OFF switch ................... 251

Window lock switch .............. 135

Windshield wipers

and washer switch.............. 180

490

Alphabetical index

Tachometer ................................ 79

Tail lights.................................. 173

Light switch ........................... 173

Replacing light bulbs............. 375

Theft deterrent system

Alarm ...................................... 70

Engine immobilizer system ..... 68

Tire inflation pressure............. 431

Maintenance data ................. 431

Warning light......................... 391

Tire information ....................... 436

Glossary................................ 443

Size....................................... 439

Tire identification number ..... 438

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading............................... 441

Tire pressure warning

system.................................... 343

Function ................................ 343

Initializing .............................. 343

Installing tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters......................... 343

Registering ID codes ............ 345

Tire pressure warning reset

switch ................................. 344

Warning light......................... 391

Tires .......................................... 342

Chains................................... 256

Checking............................... 342

If you have a flat tire ............. 397

Inflation pressure .................. 431

Information............................ 436

Replacing.............................. 397

Rotating tires......................... 342

Size....................................... 431

Snow tires ............................. 257

Spare tire .............................. 397

Tire pressure warning

system ................................ 343

Warning light......................... 391

Tools ......................................... 398

Top tether strap ......................... 64

Total load capacity .................. 157

Towing

Dinghy towing ....................... 159

Emergency towing ................ 382

Trailer towing ........................ 158

TOYOTA PARKING ASSIST

MONITOR

Toyota Safety Sense P............ 190

Automatic High Beam........... 176

Dynamic radar cruise

control ................................ 222

LDA (Lane Departure Alert

with steering control) .......... 211

PCS

(Pre-Collision System) ....... 198

TRAC (Traction Control) ......... 250

Transmission ........................... 165

Automatic transmission ........ 165

Driving mode select switch ... 248

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 169

Paddle shift switches ............ 166

S mode ................................. 166

Trip information......................... 83

Trip meters................................. 79

Trunk ........................................ 103

Internal trunk release lever ... 105

Luggage security system...... 104

Smart key system ................. 103

Trunk features ...................... 283

Trunk handle......................... 104

Trunk light............................. 105

Trunk opener main switch .... 104

Trunk opener switch ............. 103

Trunk storage extension ....... 292

Wireless remote control........ 103

Trunk light

Trunk light............................. 105

Wattage ................................ 432

Turn signal lights .................... 171

Replacing light bulbs .... 370, 372

Turn signal lever ................... 171

Wattage ................................ 432

Alphabetical index

491

USB port

Vanity lights

Vanity lights .......................... 285

Wattage ................................ 432

Vanity mirrors .......................... 285

Vehicle data recording ................ 9

Vehicle identification

number ................................... 425

Vehicle Stability Control

(VSC) ...................................... 250

Ventilators

(seat ventilators) ................... 269

VSC

(Vehicle Stability Control) .... 250

Warning buzzers

Approach warning................. 229

Brake system ........................ 388

Downshifting ......................... 169

Seat belt reminder ................ 390

Warning lights............................ 75

ABS....................................... 389

Brake system ........................ 388

Charging system................... 388

Electric power steering ......... 389

Low engine oil pressure........ 388

Low fuel level ........................ 390

Malfunction indicator lamp .... 388

Master warning light.............. 391

Open door............................. 390

Parking brake indicator ......... 388

Pre-collision system.............. 389

Seat belt reminder light......... 390

Slip indicator ......................... 390

SRS ...................................... 389

Tire pressure......................... 391

Warning messages.................. 396

Washer ..................................... 180

Checking............................... 341

Preparing and checking

before winter ...................... 255

Switch ................................... 180

Washing and waxing............... 312

Weight

Cargo capacity...................... 157

Load limits ............................ 157

Weight .................................. 424

Wheels...................................... 355

Replacing wheels ................. 355

Size....................................... 431

Window glasses ...................... 135

Window lock switch ................ 135

Windows................................... 135

Power windows..................... 135

Rear window defogger.......... 264

Windshield wipers................... 180

Intermittent windshield wipers with interval

adjuster .............................. 180

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers................................. 182

Winter driving tips................... 255

Wireless remote control

key ............................................ 92

Battery-Saving Function ....... 113

Locking/Unlocking .......... 97, 103

Replacing the battery............ 360

* : Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

492

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 328

Trunk opener

P. 103

Fuel filler door

P. 188

Hood lock release lever

P. 328

Tire inflation pressure

P. 431

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill — reference)

Engine oil type

17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp. gal.)

Unleaded gasoline only

P. 186, 426

P. 431

P. 426